diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json b/docs/drs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json index b14d01e4..9033233f 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json +++ b/docs/drs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json @@ -15,8 +15,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -99,8 +99,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -120,8 +120,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -141,8 +141,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -183,8 +183,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -204,8 +204,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -225,8 +225,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -246,8 +246,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -267,8 +267,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -288,8 +288,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -309,8 +309,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -330,8 +330,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -351,8 +351,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -372,8 +372,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -393,8 +393,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -414,8 +414,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -435,8 +435,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -456,8 +456,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -477,8 +477,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -498,8 +498,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -519,8 +519,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -540,8 +540,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -561,19 +561,40 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "githuburl":"" }, + { + "uri":"drs_04_0089.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0089.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"28", + "des":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"From MySQL to DDM,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From MySQL to DDM", + "githuburl":"" + }, { "uri":"drs_04_0090.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0090.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"28", + "code":"29", "des":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby,To the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -582,8 +603,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -594,7 +615,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0095.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0095.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"29", + "code":"30", "des":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MongoDB to DDS,To the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -603,8 +624,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -615,7 +636,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0031.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0031.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"30", + "code":"31", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Out of the Cloud", @@ -624,8 +645,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -636,7 +657,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0100.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"31", + "code":"32", "des":"To start a migration task, the source and destination database users must have permissions listed in the following table. Different types of migration tasks require diffe", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,From MySQL to MySQL,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -645,8 +666,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -657,7 +678,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0101.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0101.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"32", + "code":"33", "des":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From DDS to MongoDB,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -666,8 +687,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -678,7 +699,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0490.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0490.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"33", + "code":"34", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Between Self-built Databases", @@ -687,8 +708,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -699,7 +720,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_1117.html", "node_id":"drs_03_1117.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"34", + "code":"35", "des":"When a task is being started or in the full migration phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.To maintain data co", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,From MySQL to MySQL,Between Self-built Databases,User Guide", @@ -708,8 +729,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -720,7 +741,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0010.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"35", + "code":"36", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Management", @@ -729,8 +750,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -741,7 +762,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0002.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"36", + "code":"37", "des":"A complete real-time migration consists of creating a migration task, tracking task progress, analyzing migration logs, and comparing data consistency. By comparing multi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,Step 1: Create a Migration Task,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -750,8 +771,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -762,7 +783,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0006.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"37", + "code":"38", "des":"The migration progress of a real-time migration task helps you keep track of the status of the migration task.DRS shows the migration progress using a progress bar, helpi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,Step 2: Query the Migration Progress,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -771,8 +792,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -783,7 +804,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0005.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"38", + "code":"39", "des":"Migration logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the migration process. This section describes how to view migration logs to locate and ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view migration logs,Step 3: View Migration Logs,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -792,8 +813,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -804,7 +825,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0007.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"39", + "code":"40", "des":"This section describes how to compare migration items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. By comparing migration objects, you ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"compare migration items,Step 4: Compare Migration Items,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -813,8 +834,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -825,7 +846,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0007.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"40", + "code":"41", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing Objects", @@ -834,8 +855,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -846,7 +867,7 @@ "uri":"drs_09_0017.html", "node_id":"drs_09_0017.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"41", + "code":"42", "des":"During a database migration, accounts need to be migrated separately.During the migration of MySQL databases, there are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Migrating Accounts,Managing Objects,User Guide", @@ -855,8 +876,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -867,7 +888,7 @@ "uri":"drs_08_0001.html", "node_id":"drs_08_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"42", + "code":"43", "des":"Parameter comparison helps you check consistency between the source and destination database data to ensure your services will not be affected after being migrated.This s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Parameters for Comparison,Managing Objects,User Guide", @@ -876,8 +897,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -888,7 +909,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0008.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"43", + "code":"44", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Life Cycle", @@ -897,8 +918,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -909,7 +930,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0005.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"44", + "code":"45", "des":"This section describes how to view details about a migration task, including information about the task, replication instance, and migration.You have logged in to the DRS", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Task Details,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -918,8 +939,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -930,7 +951,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0006.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"45", + "code":"46", "des":"After a migration task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask start", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Editing Migration Task Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -939,8 +960,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -951,7 +972,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_1135.html", "node_id":"drs_03_1135.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"46", + "code":"47", "des":"During the migration, you may change the password of the source or destination database. As a result, the migration task fails. In this case, you need to change the passw", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"modify,Modifying Connection Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -960,8 +981,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -972,7 +993,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0046.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0046.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"47", + "code":"48", "des":"You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration type", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -981,8 +1002,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -993,7 +1014,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0002.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"48", + "code":"49", "des":"For a migration task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the task information, replication ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"edit,Editing a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -1002,8 +1023,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1014,7 +1035,7 @@ "uri":"drs_09_0100.html", "node_id":"drs_09_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"49", + "code":"50", "des":"A fault may occur during the migration due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space. After the fault is rectified based on the migration log information, y", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resuming a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -1023,8 +1044,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1035,7 +1056,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0100.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"50", + "code":"51", "des":"During the migration, if a migration task fails due to uncertain causes, the background will resume the task several times. However, the task may fail to be recovered in ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"reset failed migration tasks,Resetting a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -1044,8 +1065,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1056,7 +1077,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0109.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0109.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"51", + "code":"52", "des":"During migration, if the flow control mode cannot meet the requirements during peak hours, you can pause the migration task.You can pause the following migration tasks:To", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Pausing a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -1065,8 +1086,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1077,7 +1098,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0004.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"52", + "code":"53", "des":"After the source database and services are migrated to the destination database, you can stop the migration task. To prevent data from being overwritten after the source ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"stop the migration task,Stopping a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -1086,8 +1107,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1098,7 +1119,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0005.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"53", + "code":"54", "des":"This section describes how to delete a migration task that has been completed or has failed. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"delete a migration task,Deleting a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -1107,8 +1128,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1119,7 +1140,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0001.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"54", + "code":"55", "des":"Migration statuses indicate different migration phases.Table 1 lists statuses and descriptions of online migration tasks.If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the ta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,Task Statuses,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -1128,8 +1149,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1140,7 +1161,7 @@ "uri":"drs_online_tag.html", "node_id":"drs_online_tag.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"55", + "code":"56", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Tag Management,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", @@ -1149,8 +1170,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1161,7 +1182,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0001.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"56", + "code":"57", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backup Migration", @@ -1170,8 +1191,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1182,7 +1203,7 @@ "uri":"drs_offline_migration.html", "node_id":"drs_offline_migration.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"57", + "code":"58", "des":"It often becomes necessary to hide the real IP address of your database for the sake of security. Migrating data through direct connections is an option, but costly. DRS ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Migration Overview,Backup Migration,User Guide", @@ -1191,8 +1212,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1203,7 +1224,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0010.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"58", + "code":"59", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Backup Migration.This section describes constraints on backup migrations ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"backup migrations of Microsoft SQL Server databases,Creating an RDS Backup Migration Task,Backup Mig", @@ -1212,8 +1233,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1224,7 +1245,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0009.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0009.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"59", + "code":"60", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Backup Migration.This section describes constraints on backup migrations ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a Backup Using OBS Buckets,Backup Migration,User Guide", @@ -1233,8 +1254,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1245,7 +1266,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0007.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"60", + "code":"61", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Management", @@ -1254,8 +1275,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1266,7 +1287,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0002.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"61", + "code":"62", "des":"The Basic Information page of a backup migration task displays information about the task, backup files, and databases. This section describes how to view details about c", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Task Details,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -1275,8 +1296,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1287,7 +1308,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0008.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"62", + "code":"63", "des":"After a backup migration task is created, you can modify basic information about the task to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task na", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Editing Migration Task Information,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -1296,8 +1317,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1308,7 +1329,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0003.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"63", + "code":"64", "des":"Migration logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the migration process. This section describes how to view migration logs to locate and ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view migration logs,Viewing Migration Logs,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -1317,8 +1338,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1329,7 +1350,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0004.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"64", + "code":"65", "des":"This section describes how to delete a migration task. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution when performing this operation.You hav", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"delete a migration task,Deleting a Migration Task,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -1338,8 +1359,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1350,7 +1371,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0010.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"65", + "code":"66", "des":"Migration statuses indicate different migration phases.Table 1 lists statuses and descriptions of backup migration tasks.Deleted migration tasks are not displayed in the ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"statuses and descriptions of backup migration tasks,Task Statuses,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -1359,8 +1380,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1371,7 +1392,7 @@ "uri":"drs_backup_tag.html", "node_id":"drs_backup_tag.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"66", + "code":"67", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Tag Management,Backup Migration,User Guide", @@ -1380,8 +1401,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1392,7 +1413,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0002.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"67", + "code":"68", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Synchronization", @@ -1401,8 +1422,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1413,7 +1434,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0457.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0457.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"68", + "code":"69", "des":"DRS real-time synchronization supports multiple topology types. You can plan the topology types as required. For details, see the following content.To ensure data consist", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data Synchronization Topologies,Real-Time Synchronization,User Guide", @@ -1422,8 +1443,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1434,7 +1455,7 @@ "uri":"drs_06_0003.html", "node_id":"drs_06_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"69", + "code":"70", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"To the Cloud", @@ -1443,8 +1464,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1455,7 +1476,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0102.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0102.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"70", + "code":"71", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to MySQL,To the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -1464,8 +1485,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1476,7 +1497,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0104.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0104.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"71", + "code":"72", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to GaussDB Distributed,To the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -1485,8 +1506,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1497,7 +1518,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_1124.html", "node_id":"drs_03_1124.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"72", + "code":"73", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby,To the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -1506,8 +1527,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1518,7 +1539,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0107.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0107.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"73", + "code":"74", "des":"Table 2 lists the objects that can be synchronized in different scenarios. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the synchronization.To start a syn", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From PostgreSQL to PostgreSQL,To the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -1527,8 +1548,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1539,7 +1560,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0446.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0446.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"74", + "code":"75", "des":"When a task is being started or in the full synchronization phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.To keep data ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From Oracle to PostgreSQL,To the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -1548,19 +1569,40 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], "title":"From Oracle to PostgreSQL", "githuburl":"" }, + { + "uri":"drs_04_0115.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0115.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"76", + "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"From DDM to MySQL,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From DDM to MySQL", + "githuburl":"" + }, { "uri":"drs_04_0465.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0465.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"75", + "code":"77", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From DDM to DDM,To the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -1569,8 +1611,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1581,7 +1623,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0451.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0451.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"76", + "code":"78", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Out of the Cloud", @@ -1590,8 +1632,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1602,7 +1644,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0117.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0117.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"77", + "code":"79", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to MySQL,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -1611,8 +1653,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1623,7 +1665,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0118.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0118.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"78", + "code":"80", "des":"DMS for KafkaYou have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.The s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to Kafka,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -1632,19 +1674,40 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], "title":"From MySQL to Kafka", "githuburl":"" }, + { + "uri":"drs_04_0453.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0453.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"81", + "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"From DDM to MySQL,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From DDM to MySQL", + "githuburl":"" + }, { "uri":"drs_04_0121.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0121.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"79", + "code":"82", "des":"Table 2 lists the objects that can be synchronized in different scenarios. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the synchronization.Before you sta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From GaussDB Distributed to MySQL,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", @@ -1653,8 +1716,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1665,7 +1728,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0452.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0452.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"80", + "code":"83", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Between Self-built Databases", @@ -1674,8 +1737,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1686,7 +1749,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_1118.html", "node_id":"drs_03_1118.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"81", + "code":"84", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to MySQL,Between Self-built Databases,User Guide", @@ -1695,8 +1758,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1707,7 +1770,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0128.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0128.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"82", + "code":"85", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.The success of dat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to Kafka,Between Self-built Databases,User Guide", @@ -1716,8 +1779,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1728,7 +1791,7 @@ "uri":"drs_TaskMangement.html", "node_id":"drs_taskmangement.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"83", + "code":"86", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Management", @@ -1737,8 +1800,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1749,7 +1812,7 @@ "uri":"drs_06_0005.html", "node_id":"drs_06_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"84", + "code":"87", "des":"A complete real-time synchronization consists of creating a synchronization task, tracking task progress, analyzing synchronization logs, and comparing data consistency. ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Step 1: Create a Synchronization Task,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -1758,8 +1821,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1770,7 +1833,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0007.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"85", + "code":"88", "des":"This section describes how to check the synchronization progress.During a full synchronization, DRS displays the progress overview. You can view the structure, data, and ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"synchronization,view table synchronization progress,Step 2: Query the Synchronization Progress,Task ", @@ -1779,8 +1842,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1791,7 +1854,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0008.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"86", + "code":"89", "des":"Synchronization logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the synchronization process. This section describes how to view synchronization l", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view synchronization logs,Step 3: View Synchronization Logs,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -1800,8 +1863,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1812,7 +1875,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0012.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0012.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"87", + "code":"90", "des":"This section describes how to compare synchronization items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. To minimize the impact on serv", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"compare synchronization items,Step 4: Compare Synchronization Items,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -1821,8 +1884,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1833,7 +1896,7 @@ "uri":"drs_05_0007.html", "node_id":"drs_05_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"88", + "code":"91", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing Objects", @@ -1842,8 +1905,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1854,7 +1917,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0009.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0009.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"89", + "code":"92", "des":"This section describes how to change synchronization objects in a synchronization task. After a data synchronization task is created, you can change synchronization objec", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Editing Synchronization Objects,Managing Objects,User Guide", @@ -1863,8 +1926,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1875,7 +1938,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0402.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0402.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"90", + "code":"93", "des":"Real-time synchronization supports the import of objects through files. After a task is created, you can import object files on the Set Synchronization Task page.Only Win", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Importing Synchronization Objects,Managing Objects,User Guide", @@ -1884,8 +1947,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1896,7 +1959,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0015.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0015.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"91", + "code":"94", "des":"Data synchronization allows you to synchronize objects (including databases, schemas and tables) in a sources database to the corresponding objects in a destination datab", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Mapping Object Names,Managing Objects,User Guide", @@ -1905,8 +1968,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1917,7 +1980,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0100.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"92", + "code":"95", "des":"During real-time synchronization, the objects that can be mapped to the destination include databases, schemas, tables, and columns (in data processing). After a mapping ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Synchronization Mapping Information,Managing Objects,User Guide", @@ -1926,8 +1989,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1938,7 +2001,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0035.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0035.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"93", + "code":"96", "des":"DRS processes synchronized objects and allows you to add rules for selected objects.After a data filtering rule is added, update the source database to ensure data consis", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Processing Data,Managing Objects,User Guide", @@ -1947,8 +2010,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1959,7 +2022,7 @@ "uri":"drs_05_0006.html", "node_id":"drs_05_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"94", + "code":"97", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Life Cycle", @@ -1968,8 +2031,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -1980,7 +2043,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0003.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"95", + "code":"98", "des":"View the information about the synchronization tasks and synchronization instances. This section describes how to view details about a synchronization task you have creat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Task Details,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -1989,8 +2052,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2001,7 +2064,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0004.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"96", + "code":"99", "des":"After a synchronization task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying Task Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2010,8 +2073,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2022,7 +2085,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0016.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0016.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"97", + "code":"100", "des":"A data synchronization task may fail due to the change of the password of the source or destination database. You need to update the information and then retry the synchr", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"modify,Modifying Connection Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2031,8 +2094,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2043,7 +2106,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0401.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0401.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"98", + "code":"101", "des":"You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration type", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2052,8 +2115,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2064,7 +2127,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0010.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"99", + "code":"102", "des":"For a synchronization task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the source and destination d", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"edit,Editing a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2073,8 +2136,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2085,7 +2148,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0400.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0400.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"100", + "code":"103", "des":"A fault may occur during the synchronization due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space. After the fault is rectified based on the synchronization log in", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resuming a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2094,8 +2157,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2106,7 +2169,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0110.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0110.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"101", + "code":"104", "des":"DRS allows you to pause real-time synchronization tasks.The following tasks can be paused during incremental synchronization:To the cloudMySQL->MySQLPostgreSQL->PostgreSQ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Pausing a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2115,8 +2178,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2127,7 +2190,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0300.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0300.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"102", + "code":"105", "des":"During real-time synchronization, you can reset the synchronization tasks in one of the following statuses so that you do not need to configure the tasks again.PausedIncr", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resetting a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2136,8 +2199,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2148,7 +2211,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0013.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0013.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"103", + "code":"106", "des":"After the source database and services are migrated to the destination database, you can stop the synchronization task. To prevent data from being overwritten after the s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"stop the synchronization task,Stopping a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2157,8 +2220,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2169,7 +2232,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0014.html", "node_id":"drs_10_0014.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"104", + "code":"107", "des":"This section describes how to delete a synchronization task that has been completed or has failed. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise ca", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"delete a synchronization task,Deleting a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2178,8 +2241,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2190,7 +2253,7 @@ "uri":"drs_06_0004.html", "node_id":"drs_06_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"105", + "code":"108", "des":"Synchronization statuses indicate different synchronization phases.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Statuses,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2199,8 +2262,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2211,7 +2274,7 @@ "uri":"drs_synchronization_tag.html", "node_id":"drs_synchronization_tag.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"106", + "code":"109", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Tag Management,Real-Time Synchronization,User Guide", @@ -2220,8 +2283,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2232,7 +2295,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_1113.html", "node_id":"drs_03_1113.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"107", + "code":"110", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios", @@ -2241,8 +2304,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2253,7 +2316,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0052.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0052.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"108", + "code":"111", "des":"Data synchronized to the Kafka cluster is stored in JSON, and JSON-C formats.For details about the JSON format from MySQL to Kafka, see Table 1. Parameters for synchroniz", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Kafka Message Format,Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios,User Guide", @@ -2262,8 +2325,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2274,7 +2337,7 @@ "uri":"drs_05_0018.html", "node_id":"drs_05_0018.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"109", + "code":"112", "des":"No security authentication mode is available. You only need to enter the IP address and port for connection.The SASL mechanism is used to connect to Kafka, and you need t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Kafka Authentication,Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios,User Guide", @@ -2283,8 +2346,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2295,7 +2358,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_1131.html", "node_id":"drs_03_1131.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"110", + "code":"113", "des":"This section describes how to clear the streaming replication slots of the source GaussDB distributed database after the incremental or full+incremental synchronization t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of GaussDB Distributed,Operation Reference in Synchronization Scen", @@ -2304,8 +2367,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2316,7 +2379,7 @@ "uri":"drs_12_0009.html", "node_id":"drs_12_0009.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"111", + "code":"114", "des":"This section describes how to clear the logical replication slot of the source database, how to synchronize sequence values, and how to reset the sequence values in the d", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of PostgreSQL,Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios,Use", @@ -2325,8 +2388,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2337,7 +2400,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0088.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0088.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"112", + "code":"115", "des":"This section describes how to perform real-time synchronization from PostgreSQL to RDS PostgreSQL. You can create triggers and functions in the source database to obtain ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating Triggers and Functions to Implement Incremental DDL Synchronization for PostgreSQL,Operatio", @@ -2346,8 +2409,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2358,7 +2421,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0023.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0023.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"113", + "code":"116", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery", @@ -2367,8 +2430,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2379,7 +2442,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0024.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0024.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"114", + "code":"117", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DR Scenarios", @@ -2388,8 +2451,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2400,7 +2463,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0122.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0122.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"115", + "code":"118", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to MySQL,DR Scenarios,User Guide", @@ -2409,8 +2472,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2421,7 +2484,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0123.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0123.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"116", + "code":"119", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby,DR Scenarios,User Guide", @@ -2430,8 +2493,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2442,7 +2505,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0125.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0125.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"117", + "code":"120", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From Cassandra to Cassandra,DR Scenarios,User Guide", @@ -2451,8 +2514,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2463,7 +2526,7 @@ "uri":"drs_07_0007.html", "node_id":"drs_07_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"118", + "code":"121", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Management", @@ -2472,8 +2535,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2484,7 +2547,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0027.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0027.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"119", + "code":"122", "des":"To prevent service unavailability caused by regional faults, DRS provides disaster recovery to ensure service continuity. If the region where the primary instance is loca", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DR instance,Step 1: Create a DR Task,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -2493,8 +2556,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2505,7 +2568,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0028.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0028.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"120", + "code":"123", "des":"After a DR task starts, you can check the DR progress.You have logged in to the DRS console.A DR task has been created and started.On the Disaster Recovery Progress tab, ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view the DR progress,Step 2: Query the DR Progress,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -2514,8 +2577,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2526,7 +2589,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0029.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0029.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"121", + "code":"124", "des":"DR logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the DR process. This section describes how to view DR logs to locate and analyze database prob", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view DR logs,Step 3: View DR Logs,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -2535,8 +2598,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2547,7 +2610,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0033.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0033.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"122", + "code":"125", "des":"DR item comparison: You can compare DR items to check data consistency between the service database and DR database. Currently, you can compare the following items during", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Step 4: Compare DR Items,Task Management,User Guide", @@ -2556,8 +2619,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2568,7 +2631,7 @@ "uri":"drs_07_0008.html", "node_id":"drs_07_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"123", + "code":"126", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Life Cycle", @@ -2577,8 +2640,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2589,7 +2652,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_1134.html", "node_id":"drs_03_1134.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"124", + "code":"127", "des":"After a DR task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask start timeYo", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Editing Subscription Task Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2598,19 +2661,40 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], "title":"Editing Subscription Task Information", "githuburl":"" }, + { + "uri":"drs_03_1138.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1138.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"128", + "des":"A data DR task may fail due to the password change of the service or DR database. You need to update the information and then retry the DR task on the DRS console.You can", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Modifying Connection Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Modifying Connection Information", + "githuburl":"" + }, { "uri":"drs_03_0047.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0047.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"125", + "code":"129", "des":"DRS allows you to change the flow control mode for a task. Currently, only the following DR tasks support this function.MySQL->MySQLMySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/st", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2619,8 +2703,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2631,7 +2715,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0026.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0026.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"126", + "code":"130", "des":"For a DR task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the source and destination database detai", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"edit,Editing a DR Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2640,8 +2724,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2652,7 +2736,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0027.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0027.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"127", + "code":"131", "des":"A fault may occur during DR due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space.If a DR task fails due to non-network problems, the system will automatically resu", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resuming a DR Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2661,8 +2745,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2673,7 +2757,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0024.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0024.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"128", + "code":"132", "des":"DRS monitors the DB instance performance and the migration progress. With the monitoring information, you can determine the data flow health status, data integrity, and d", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing DR Metrics,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2682,8 +2766,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2694,7 +2778,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_1116.html", "node_id":"drs_03_1116.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"129", + "code":"133", "des":"DRS supports primary/standby switchover for DR tasks. If both RPO and RTO are 0, data has been completely migrated to the DR database. Then, you can determine whether to ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Performing a Primary/Standby Switchover for DR Tasks,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2703,8 +2787,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2715,7 +2799,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0029.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0029.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"130", + "code":"134", "des":"When the DR task is complete or no longer needed, you can stop the DR task. You can stop a task in any of the following statuses:CreatingConfigurationInitializingDisaster", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"stop the DR task,Stopping a DR Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2724,8 +2808,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2736,7 +2820,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0030.html", "node_id":"drs_03_0030.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"131", + "code":"135", "des":"You can delete a DR task, when it is no longer needed Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution when performing this operation.You have", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"delete a DR task,Deleting a DR Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2745,8 +2829,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2757,7 +2841,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0025.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0025.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"132", + "code":"136", "des":"DR statuses indicate different DR phases.Table 1 lists DR task statuses and descriptions.If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. Af", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DR task statuses,Task Statuses,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", @@ -2766,8 +2850,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2778,7 +2862,7 @@ "uri":"drs_disaster_tag.html", "node_id":"drs_disaster_tag.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"133", + "code":"137", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Tag Management,Real-Time Disaster Recovery,User Guide", @@ -2787,8 +2871,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2799,7 +2883,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0099.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0099.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"134", + "code":"138", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"FAQs", @@ -2808,8 +2892,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2820,7 +2904,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0103.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0103.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"135", + "code":"139", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Product Consulting", @@ -2829,8 +2913,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2841,7 +2925,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0103.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0103.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"136", + "code":"140", "des":"A region and availability zone (AZ) identify the location of a data center. You can create resources in a specific region and AZ.A region is a physical data center. Each ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are Regions and AZs?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -2850,8 +2934,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2862,7 +2946,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0100.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"137", + "code":"141", "des":"DRS is a stable, efficient, and easy-to-use cloud service for database migration and synchronization in real time.It simplifies data migration processes and reduces migra", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DRS,What Is DRS?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -2871,8 +2955,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2883,7 +2967,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0105.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0105.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"138", + "code":"142", "des":"Yes. DRS provides high availability and can migrate a single RDS instance or RDS primary/standby instances. DRS can automatically rebuild the databases connection after a", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migrate a single RDS instance or RDS primary/standby instances,Can DRS Migrate RDS Primary/Standby I", @@ -2892,8 +2976,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2904,7 +2988,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0031.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0031.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"139", + "code":"143", "des":"In database migration scenarios, if a migration task fails due to unavoidable problems (such as network fluctuation), DRS records the current parsing and replay point (wh", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Does DRS Support Resumable Uploads?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -2913,8 +2997,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2925,7 +3009,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0087.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0087.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"140", + "code":"144", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are the Differences Between Real-Time Migration, Real-Time DR, and Real-Time Synchronization?,P", @@ -2934,8 +3018,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2946,7 +3030,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1133.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1133.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"141", + "code":"145", "des":"In the full migration phase, DRS uses the row-level parallel migration mode to ensure migration performance and transmission stability. If the source database data is com", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Solve the Table Bloat Issue?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -2955,8 +3039,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2967,7 +3051,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1142.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1142.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"142", + "code":"146", "des":"RDS read replicas cannot be selected on the DRS console. You can select Self-built on ECS and enter the read replica IP address and port number to connect to the instance", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Cannot I Select RDS Read Replicas on the DRS Console?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -2976,8 +3060,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -2988,7 +3072,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1145.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1145.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"143", + "code":"147", "des":"During the initialization of a full migration or synchronization task, DRS needs to query all inventory data in the source database. DRS uses simple SQL statements to que", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Does DRS Affect the Source and Destination Databases?,Product Consulting,User Guide", @@ -2997,8 +3081,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3009,7 +3093,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0108.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0108.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"144", + "code":"148", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Network and Security", @@ -3018,8 +3102,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3030,7 +3114,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0109.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0109.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"145", + "code":"149", "des":"Uses security groups to ensure that the sources of access are trusted.Uses SSL channels to encrypt data during transmission.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Security Protection Policies Does DRS Have?,Network and Security,User Guide", @@ -3039,8 +3123,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3051,7 +3135,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0110.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0110.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"146", + "code":"150", "des":"If the network is disconnected during the migration, you can view the task status first. If a full or incremental task fails, click Resume in the Operation column.Full mi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do If the Network Is Disconnected During the Migration?,Network and Security,User Guide", @@ -3060,8 +3144,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3072,7 +3156,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0112.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0112.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"147", + "code":"151", "des":"By default, a VPC on the current cloud is isolated from external networks for security reasons. You cannot use an EIP outside a VPC (for example, an EIP of another cloud ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Configure a VPC Security Group to Allow Traffic from an EIP?,Network and Security,User Gui", @@ -3081,8 +3165,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3093,7 +3177,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0100.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"148", + "code":"152", "des":"Before data migration, ensure that network preparations and security rule settings are complete. If the connection is abnormal, check whether the network configuration is", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do If the Network Connection Between the Replication Instance and Database Is Abnormal?,N", @@ -3102,8 +3186,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3114,7 +3198,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0040.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0040.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"149", + "code":"153", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Permissions Management", @@ -3123,8 +3207,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3135,7 +3219,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0034.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0034.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"150", + "code":"154", "des":"DRS has certain permission requirements on accounts during migration, synchronization, and DR. This section describes the permission requirements on the MySQL engine.You ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Which MySQL Permissions Are Required for DRS?,Permissions Management,User Guide", @@ -3144,8 +3228,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3156,7 +3240,7 @@ "uri":"drs_12_0001.html", "node_id":"drs_12_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"151", + "code":"155", "des":"mysql -h 'host' -u 'user' -p-N $@ -e \"SELECT CONCAT('SHOW GRANTS FOR ''', user, '''@''', host, ''';') AS query FROM mysql.user\" > /tmp/users.sqlhost indicates the IP add", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Import Users and Permissions from the Source to the Destination Database?,Permissions Mana", @@ -3165,8 +3249,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3177,7 +3261,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0025.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0025.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"152", + "code":"156", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Migration", @@ -3186,8 +3270,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3198,7 +3282,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0104.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0104.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"153", + "code":"157", "des":"You can refer to the following methods to check whether the task can be stopped. Before stopping the task, ensure that:At least one complete data comparison is performed ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"When Can I Stop a Migration Task?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", @@ -3207,8 +3291,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3219,7 +3303,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0003.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"154", + "code":"158", "des":"Definer is used in views, stored procedures, triggers, and events. Definer does not restrict the permission to invoke objects, instead the permission to access the databa", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Maintain the Original Service User Permission System After Definer Is Forcibly Converted Du", @@ -3228,8 +3312,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3240,7 +3324,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0121.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0121.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"155", + "code":"159", "des":"After the MySQL stored procedure is migrated to the cloud, an error may occur when the stored procedure or function is invoked due to permission problems.The method varie", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do If the Invoking Permission Problem Occurs After the MySQL Stored Procedure Is Migrated", @@ -3249,8 +3333,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3261,7 +3345,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0020.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0020.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"156", + "code":"160", "des":"To ensure that all services on the database are stopped, perform the following steps:", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Ensure that All Services on the Database Are Stopped?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", @@ -3270,8 +3354,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3282,7 +3366,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0123.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0123.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"157", + "code":"161", "des":"When you use a subaccount to use scheduled task startup function, the account entrustment function must be used. Otherwise, the scheduled task fails to be started, leavin", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Security Administrator,What Can I Do When Scheduled Task Failed to Start Leaving Message \"can not ge", @@ -3291,8 +3375,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3303,7 +3387,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0032.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0032.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"158", + "code":"162", "des":"Currently, RDS for MySQL does not support the MyISAM engine due to the following reasons.MyISAM engine tables do not support transactions and support only table-level loc", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do If MyISAM Tables Are Not Supported by RDS for MySQL?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", @@ -3312,8 +3396,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3324,7 +3408,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0030.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0030.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"159", + "code":"163", "des":"Based on MySQL 5.7, some new features have been added to MySQL 8.0. There are performance differences between the two versions. Before migration, you need to analyze comp", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are the Precautions for Migrating Data from an Earlier Version MySQL to MySQL 8.0?,Real-Time Mi", @@ -3333,8 +3417,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3345,7 +3429,7 @@ "uri":"drs_15_0100.html", "node_id":"drs_15_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"160", + "code":"164", "des":"Out of memory (OOM) occurs during the migration from MongoDB to DDS, causing migration failures.The possible causes are as follows:If the mongod service of the source dat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do When OOM Occurs During the Migration from MongoDB to DDS?,Real-Time Migration,User Gui", @@ -3354,8 +3438,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3366,7 +3450,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0001.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"161", + "code":"165", "des":"Before using the DRS service to migrate collections between sharded clusters, you must disable the balancer of the collections to be migrated.After the migration is compl", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Disable the Balancer?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", @@ -3375,8 +3459,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3387,7 +3471,7 @@ "uri":"drs_14_0006.html", "node_id":"drs_14_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"162", + "code":"166", "des":"During the MySQL to MySQL migration, if the migration log indicates that the migration of events and triggers fails after the migration task is complete, you can manually", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Export and Import Events and Triggers in Batches?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", @@ -3396,8 +3480,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3408,7 +3492,7 @@ "uri":"drs_14_0002.html", "node_id":"drs_14_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"163", + "code":"167", "des":"When the value of source database parameter lower_case_table_names is set to 1, the databases or tables whose names contain uppercase letters cannot be migrated.When the ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Migrate Databases or Tables Whose Names Contain Uppercase Letters?,Real-Time Migration,Use", @@ -3417,8 +3501,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3429,7 +3513,7 @@ "uri":"drs_09_0101.html", "node_id":"drs_09_0101.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"164", + "code":"168", "des":"In a sharded cluster, orphaned documents are those documents on a shard that also exist in chunks on other shards as a result of failed migrations or incomplete migration", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Delete Orphaned Documents in MongoDB Sharded Clusters?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", @@ -3438,8 +3522,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3450,7 +3534,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0457.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0457.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"165", + "code":"169", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backup Migration", @@ -3459,8 +3543,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3471,7 +3555,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0041.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0041.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"166", + "code":"170", "des":"During the backup migration, If Last Backup File is selected by mistake, perform either of the following operations:If you select Yes by mistake, the database receives a ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If the Last Backup File Is Incorrectly Selected in the Backup Migration Scenario?,B", @@ -3480,8 +3564,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3492,7 +3576,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0458.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0458.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"167", + "code":"171", "des":"After data is migrated from the local host or VMs to the RDS SQL Server DB instance on the current cloud through DRS, the Login accounts, DBLink, AgentJobs, and key confi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Manual Configuration,Backup Migration,User Guide", @@ -3501,8 +3585,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3513,7 +3597,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0026.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0026.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"168", + "code":"172", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Synchronization", @@ -3522,8 +3606,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3534,7 +3618,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0101.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0101.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"169", + "code":"173", "des":"DRS can directly synchronize tables of different schemas to those of the same schema if the tables do not conflict with each other.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can DRS Sync Tables of Different Schemas to the Same Schema?,Real-Time Synchronization,User Guide", @@ -3543,8 +3627,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3555,7 +3639,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1124.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1124.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"170", + "code":"174", "des":"During table-level incremental synchronization from MySQL to MySQL, you can use Online DDL tools to add or delete columns. Pay attention to the following when using Onlin", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can Online DDL Tools Be Used for Real-time Synchronization?,Real-Time Synchronization,User Guide", @@ -3564,8 +3648,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3576,7 +3660,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1151.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1151.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"171", + "code":"175", "des":"If the source Oracle database is an RAC cluster, you are advised to use SCAN IP+SERVICE_NAMES to create a task because SCAN IP has stronger fault tolerance, better load b", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Do I Use the SCAN IP Address to Connect to an Oracle RAC Cluster?,Real-Time Synchronization,User", @@ -3585,8 +3669,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3597,7 +3681,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1155.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1155.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"172", + "code":"176", "des":"In physical standby mode, the Oracle database directly replicates logs from the primary database and does not generate any logs. If the source is an Oracle database, you ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Check Supplemental Logging of the Source Oracle Database?,Real-Time Synchronization,User Gu", @@ -3606,8 +3690,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3618,7 +3702,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0028.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0028.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"173", + "code":"177", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery", @@ -3627,8 +3711,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3639,7 +3723,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0033.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0033.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"174", + "code":"178", "des":"Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the difference between the time when a transaction in the current service database is submitted and the time when the transaction", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are RPO and RTO of DRS Disaster Recovery?,Real-Time Disaster Recovery,User Guide", @@ -3648,8 +3732,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3660,7 +3744,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1125.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1125.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"175", + "code":"179", "des":"For real-time DR tasks, if the service database is faulty, manually perform a primary/standby switchover. For details, see Performing a Primary/Standby Switchover for DR ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Is a Primary/Standby Switchover Triggered Automatically or Manually for DR Tasks?,Real-Time Disaster", @@ -3669,8 +3753,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3681,7 +3765,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1126.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1126.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"176", + "code":"180", "des":"Real-time DR is performed by instance. You cannot select a specified database, but you can select tables or databases for real-time migration and synchronization task.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can Real-Time DR Be Performed for Specified Databases?,Real-Time Disaster Recovery,User Guide", @@ -3690,8 +3774,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3702,7 +3786,7 @@ "uri":"drs_14_0001.html", "node_id":"drs_14_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"177", + "code":"181", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data-Level Comparison", @@ -3711,8 +3795,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3723,7 +3807,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1130.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1130.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"178", + "code":"182", "des":"DRS's data comparison allows you to check whether the data in the source database is the same as that in the destination database.DRS does not support value comparison fo", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Which of the Following Data Types Are Not Supported By Value Comparison?,Data-Level Comparison,User ", @@ -3732,8 +3816,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3744,7 +3828,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1161.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1161.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"179", + "code":"183", "des":"Object comparison: System tables of the source and destination databases are queried, occupying about 10 sessions. The database is not affected. However, if there are a l", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Impact Does a DRS Comparison Task Have on Databases?,Data-Level Comparison,User Guide", @@ -3753,8 +3837,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3765,7 +3849,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1162.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1162.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"180", + "code":"184", "des":"Object comparison: Generally, the comparison results are returned within several minutes based on the query performance of the source database. If the amount of data is l", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Long Does a DRS Comparison Task Take?,Data-Level Comparison,User Guide", @@ -3774,8 +3858,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3786,7 +3870,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0029.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0029.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"181", + "code":"185", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"General Operations", @@ -3795,8 +3879,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3807,7 +3891,7 @@ "uri":"drs_15_0120.html", "node_id":"drs_15_0120.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"182", + "code":"186", "des":"Information often overlaps when you decrease the size of the page. You are advised to set the page scale at 100%.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do When Information Overlaps on the DRS Console?,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -3816,8 +3900,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3828,7 +3912,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0021.html", "node_id":"drs_04_0021.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"183", + "code":"187", "des":"During the migration, the destination instance can be set to read-only or read/write.Read-only: During the migration, the destination instance is read-only. After the mig", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Is the Destination Instance Set to Read-only or Read/Write?,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -3837,8 +3921,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3849,7 +3933,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0002.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"184", + "code":"188", "des":"During migration for MySQL databases, the source database binlog must be in the ROW format. Otherwise, the task fails. After binlog_format=ROW at the global level is set ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Set Global binlog_format=ROW to Take Effect Immediately?,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -3858,8 +3942,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3870,7 +3954,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0010.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"185", + "code":"189", "des":"When migrating MySQL databases, ensure that the binlog_row_image parameter of the source database is set to FULL. Otherwise, the migration task will fail. After binlog_ro", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Set binlog_row_image=FULL to Take Effect Immediately?,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -3879,8 +3963,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3891,7 +3975,7 @@ "uri":"drs_14_0004.html", "node_id":"drs_14_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"186", + "code":"190", "des":"When you set the password for the migration account in the destination database, you need to set the password based on the password strength requirements of the destinati", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Change the Destination Database Password to Meet the Password Policy?,General Operations,Us", @@ -3900,8 +3984,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3912,7 +3996,7 @@ "uri":"drs_14_0003.html", "node_id":"drs_14_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"187", + "code":"191", "des":"MongoDB shards data at the collection level, distributing the collection data using shard keys.You choose the shard key when sharding a collection. Each record contains a", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Configure the Shard Key for a MongoDB Sharded Cluster?,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -3921,8 +4005,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3933,7 +4017,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0102.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0102.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"188", + "code":"192", "des":"When the cloud connection bandwidth is expanded, the bandwidth link needs to be re-established and the network is disconnected. Whether the network disconnection affects ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Does Bandwidth Expansion Affect the Running DRS Tasks?,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -3942,8 +4026,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3954,7 +4038,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0122.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0122.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"189", + "code":"193", "des":"In some MariaDB versions, the SysDB database is used as a system database (similar to the sys database of MySQL 5.7). Therefore, DRS considers the SysDB database as the s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Data in MariaDB and SysDB Cannot Be Migrated?,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -3963,8 +4047,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3975,7 +4059,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_0120.html", "node_id":"drs_16_0120.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"190", + "code":"194", "des":"DRS supports many-to-one scenarios during migration of different types of instances and tables to suit your service requirements.To ensure that there is sufficient space ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Constraints and Operation Suggestions on Many-to-One Scenario,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -3984,8 +4068,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -3996,7 +4080,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0101.html", "node_id":"drs_01_0101.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"191", + "code":"195", "des":"You can view DRS operation logs on the Cloud Trace Service (CTS) console.Click the username in the upper right corner and select Operation Log from the drop-down list.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DRS,Where Can I View DRS Operation Logs?,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -4005,8 +4089,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4017,7 +4101,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1140.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1140.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"192", + "code":"196", "des":"No. DRS cannot restart a completed task.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can a Completed Task Be Restarted?,General Operations,User Guide", @@ -4026,8 +4110,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4038,7 +4122,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1143.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1143.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"193", + "code":"197", "des":"You can reset a task when the task is suspended or fails. Resetting a task does not clear the destination database. You can determine whether to clear the destination dat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are the Differences Between Resetting a Task and Recreating a Task?,General Operations,User Gui", @@ -4047,8 +4131,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4059,7 +4143,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1156.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1156.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"194", + "code":"198", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Delay", @@ -4068,8 +4152,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4080,7 +4164,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1148.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1148.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"195", + "code":"199", "des":"Recovery Time Objective (RTO) is duration of time within which transactions on the DRS instance are transmitted and replayed to the destination database during incrementa", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Does the Delay of DR Tasks Increase?,Delay,User Guide", @@ -4089,8 +4173,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4101,7 +4185,7 @@ "uri":"drs_16_1157.html", "node_id":"drs_16_1157.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"196", + "code":"200", "des":"Migration from MongoDB to DDSMigration from DDS to MongoDBTo ensure the performance of migration, synchronization, or disaster recovery, DRS performs concurrent replay at", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Is the Delay High In Migration from MongoDB to DDS?,Delay,User Guide", @@ -4110,8 +4194,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4122,7 +4206,7 @@ "uri":"drs_13_0001.html", "node_id":"drs_13_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"197", + "code":"201", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Troubleshooting", @@ -4131,8 +4215,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4143,7 +4227,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0001.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"198", + "code":"202", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Solutions to Failed Check Items", @@ -4152,8 +4236,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4164,7 +4248,7 @@ "uri":"drs_12_0005.html", "node_id":"drs_12_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"199", + "code":"203", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Disk Space", @@ -4173,8 +4257,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4185,7 +4269,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0010.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"200", + "code":"204", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has Sufficient Storage Space,Disk Space,User Guide", @@ -4194,8 +4278,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4206,7 +4290,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0076.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0076.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"201", + "code":"205", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Server Has Sufficient Storage Space,Disk Space,User Guide", @@ -4215,8 +4299,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4227,7 +4311,7 @@ "uri":"drs_12_0008.html", "node_id":"drs_12_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"202", + "code":"206", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Parameters", @@ -4236,8 +4320,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4248,7 +4332,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0014.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0014.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"203", + "code":"207", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"source database binlog,Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Enabled,Database Parameters,Us", @@ -4257,8 +4341,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4269,7 +4353,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0015.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0015.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"204", + "code":"208", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"source database binlog,Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Row-Based,Database Parameters,", @@ -4278,8 +4362,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4290,7 +4374,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0016.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0016.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"205", + "code":"209", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"binlog retention period,Checking Whether the Binlog Retention Period Is Set on the Source Database,D", @@ -4299,8 +4383,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4311,7 +4395,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0013.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0013.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"206", + "code":"210", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Character Sets Are Consistent,Database Paramete", @@ -4320,8 +4404,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4332,7 +4416,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0018.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0018.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"207", + "code":"211", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database server_id Meets the Incremental Migration Requirements,Database", @@ -4341,8 +4425,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4353,7 +4437,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0019.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0019.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"208", + "code":"212", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"case sensitivity,Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Table Names Are Consistent in ", @@ -4362,8 +4446,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4374,7 +4458,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0022.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0022.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"209", + "code":"213", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Object Names with Non-ASCII Characters,Database Parame", @@ -4383,8 +4467,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4395,7 +4479,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0023.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0023.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"210", + "code":"214", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the TIME_ZONE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Database ", @@ -4404,8 +4488,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4416,7 +4500,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0024.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0024.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"211", + "code":"215", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the COLLATION_SERVER Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Da", @@ -4425,8 +4509,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4437,7 +4521,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0025.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0025.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"212", + "code":"216", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SERVER_UUID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Databas", @@ -4446,8 +4530,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4458,7 +4542,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0044.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0044.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"213", + "code":"217", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SERVER_ID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are Different,Database", @@ -4467,8 +4551,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4479,7 +4563,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0049.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0049.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"214", + "code":"218", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Invalid sql_mode Values,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4488,8 +4572,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4500,7 +4584,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0059.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0059.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"215", + "code":"219", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SQL_MODE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Database P", @@ -4509,8 +4593,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4521,7 +4605,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0228.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0228.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"216", + "code":"220", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the sql_mode Value in the Destination Database Is Not NO_ENGINE_SUBSTITUTION,Databa", @@ -4530,8 +4614,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4542,7 +4626,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0060.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0060.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"217", + "code":"221", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the innodb_strict_mode Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,", @@ -4551,8 +4635,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4563,7 +4647,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0053.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0053.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"218", + "code":"222", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the max_wal_senders Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured,Database P", @@ -4572,8 +4656,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4584,7 +4668,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0054.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0054.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"219", + "code":"223", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the WAL_LEVEL Value in the Source Database Is Correct,Database Parameters,User Guid", @@ -4593,8 +4677,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4605,7 +4689,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0055.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0055.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"220", + "code":"224", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the MAX_REPLICATION_SLOTS Value in the Source Database Is Correct,Database Paramete", @@ -4614,8 +4698,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4626,7 +4710,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0056.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0056.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"221", + "code":"225", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is on Standby,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4635,8 +4719,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4647,7 +4731,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0061.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0061.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"222", + "code":"226", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the log_slave_updates Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured,Database", @@ -4656,8 +4740,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4668,7 +4752,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0063.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0063.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"223", + "code":"227", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the BLOCK_SIZE Value of the Source Database Is the Same as That of the Destination ", @@ -4677,8 +4761,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4689,7 +4773,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0064.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0064.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"224", + "code":"228", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the binlog_row_image Value is FULL,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4698,8 +4782,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4710,7 +4794,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0453.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0453.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"225", + "code":"229", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Transaction Isolation Levels are Consistent,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4719,8 +4803,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4731,7 +4815,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0038.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0038.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"226", + "code":"230", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the lc_monetary Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Databas", @@ -4740,8 +4824,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4752,7 +4836,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0073.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0073.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"227", + "code":"231", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Trigger Names with Non-ASCII Characters,Database Param", @@ -4761,8 +4845,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4773,7 +4857,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0200.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0200.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"228", + "code":"232", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Collections Contain More Than 10 Indexes,Database Parameters,Us", @@ -4782,8 +4866,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4794,7 +4878,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0227.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0227.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"229", + "code":"233", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in Both the Source and Destination Dat", @@ -4803,8 +4887,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4815,7 +4899,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0225.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0225.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"230", + "code":"234", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in the Destination Database,Database P", @@ -4824,8 +4908,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4836,7 +4920,7 @@ "uri":"drs_15_0017.html", "node_id":"drs_15_0017.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"231", + "code":"235", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the max_allowed_packet Value of the Destination Database Is too Small,Database Para", @@ -4845,8 +4929,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4857,7 +4941,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_043.html", "node_id":"drs_03_043.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"232", + "code":"236", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Character Set Is Supported,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4866,8 +4950,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4878,7 +4962,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_045.html", "node_id":"drs_03_045.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"233", + "code":"237", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Databases and Tables Exist,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4887,8 +4971,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4899,7 +4983,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_1130.html", "node_id":"drs_03_1130.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"234", + "code":"238", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether session_replication_role of the Destination Database Is correctly Set,Database Para", @@ -4908,8 +4992,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4920,7 +5004,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0066.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0066.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"235", + "code":"239", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the MongoDB Instance Type Matches the Migration Mode,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4929,8 +5013,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4941,7 +5025,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0465.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0465.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"236", + "code":"240", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking the Physical Standby Database,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4950,8 +5034,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4962,7 +5046,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0469.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0469.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"237", + "code":"241", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Values of group_concat_max_len Are Consistent,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4971,8 +5055,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -4983,7 +5067,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0471.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0471.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"238", + "code":"242", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Character Sets Are Compatible,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -4992,8 +5076,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5004,7 +5088,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0481.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0481.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"239", + "code":"243", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Unsupported Table Field Types,Database Parameters,User", @@ -5013,8 +5097,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5025,7 +5109,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0482.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0482.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"240", + "code":"244", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Replication Attribute of Primary Key Columns,Database Parameters,User Guide", @@ -5034,8 +5118,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5046,7 +5130,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0464.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0464.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"241", + "code":"245", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Source DB Instance Statuses", @@ -5055,8 +5139,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5067,7 +5151,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0046.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0046.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"242", + "code":"246", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Databases Are of the Same Type,Source DB Instance Status", @@ -5076,8 +5160,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5088,7 +5172,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0463.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0463.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"243", + "code":"247", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the ChangeStream API of the source DB instance is available,Source DB Instance Stat", @@ -5097,8 +5181,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5109,7 +5193,7 @@ "uri":"drs_12_0006.html", "node_id":"drs_12_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"244", + "code":"248", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Destination DB Instance Statuses", @@ -5118,8 +5202,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5130,7 +5214,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0011.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0011.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"245", + "code":"249", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Involved in Another Migration Task,Destination DB Insta", @@ -5139,8 +5223,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5151,7 +5235,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0050.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0050.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"246", + "code":"250", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has a Read Replica,Destination DB Instance Statuses,User G", @@ -5160,8 +5244,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5172,7 +5256,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0041.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0041.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"247", + "code":"251", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Extensions Are Supported,Destination DB Instance Statuses,User Guide", @@ -5181,8 +5265,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5193,7 +5277,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0075.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0075.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"248", + "code":"252", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether Destination Contains the Configured Database,Destination DB Instance Statuses,User ", @@ -5202,8 +5286,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5214,7 +5298,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0230.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0230.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"249", + "code":"253", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination DB Instance Is Available,Destination DB Instance Statuses,User Guid", @@ -5223,8 +5307,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5235,7 +5319,7 @@ "uri":"drs_12_0007.html", "node_id":"drs_12_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"250", + "code":"254", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database User Permissions", @@ -5244,8 +5328,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5256,7 +5340,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0009.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0009.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"251", + "code":"255", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"source database user,Checking Whether the Source Database User Has Sufficient Permissions,Database U", @@ -5265,8 +5349,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5277,7 +5361,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0008.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"252", + "code":"256", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"destination database user,Checking Whether the Destination Database User Has Sufficient Permissions,", @@ -5286,8 +5370,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5298,7 +5382,7 @@ "uri":"drs_12_0004.html", "node_id":"drs_12_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"253", + "code":"257", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Versions", @@ -5307,8 +5391,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5319,7 +5403,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0005.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"254", + "code":"258", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"source database version,Checking Whether the Source Database Version Is Supported,Database Versions,", @@ -5328,8 +5412,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5340,7 +5424,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0006.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"255", + "code":"259", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"destination database version,Checking Whether the Destination Database Version Is Supported,Database", @@ -5349,8 +5433,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5361,7 +5445,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0007.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"256", + "code":"260", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Migration Is from an Earlier Database Version to the Same or a Later Version,Da", @@ -5370,8 +5454,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5382,7 +5466,7 @@ "uri":"drs_12_0003.html", "node_id":"drs_12_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"257", + "code":"261", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Networks", @@ -5391,8 +5475,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5403,7 +5487,7 @@ "uri":"drs_precheck.html", "node_id":"drs_precheck.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"258", + "code":"262", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is Connected,Networks,User Guide", @@ -5412,8 +5496,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5424,7 +5508,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0002.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"259", + "code":"263", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Connected,Networks,User Guide", @@ -5433,8 +5517,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5445,7 +5529,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0003.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"260", + "code":"264", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Can Connect to the Source Database,Networks,User Guide", @@ -5454,8 +5538,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5466,7 +5550,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0067.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0067.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"261", + "code":"265", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Objects", @@ -5475,8 +5559,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5487,7 +5571,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0048.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0048.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"262", + "code":"266", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains a MyISAM Table,Database Objects,User Guide", @@ -5496,8 +5580,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5508,7 +5592,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0080.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0080.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"263", + "code":"267", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains the Functions or Stored Procedures that the Source Dat", @@ -5517,8 +5601,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5529,7 +5613,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0117.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0117.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"264", + "code":"268", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Use Storage Engines Not Supported by the Destination Dat", @@ -5538,8 +5622,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5550,7 +5634,7 @@ "uri":"drs_15_0020.html", "node_id":"drs_15_0020.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"265", + "code":"269", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Contain Primary Keys,Database Objects,User Guide", @@ -5559,8 +5643,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5571,7 +5655,7 @@ "uri":"drs_15_0021.html", "node_id":"drs_15_0021.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"266", + "code":"270", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Triggers or Events,Database Objects,User Guide", @@ -5580,8 +5664,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5592,7 +5676,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0068.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0068.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"267", + "code":"271", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Configuration Items", @@ -5601,8 +5685,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5613,7 +5697,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0045.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0045.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"268", + "code":"272", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Name Is Valid,Database Configuration Items,User Guide", @@ -5622,8 +5706,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5634,7 +5718,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0105.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0105.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"269", + "code":"273", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Table Name Is Valid,Database Configuration Items,User Guide", @@ -5643,8 +5727,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5655,7 +5739,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0072.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0072.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"270", + "code":"274", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database View Name Is Valid,Database Configuration Items,User Guide", @@ -5664,8 +5748,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5676,7 +5760,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0069.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0069.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"271", + "code":"275", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Shard Key Can Be Obtained from the Source Database,Database Configuration Items", @@ -5685,8 +5769,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5697,7 +5781,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0070.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0070.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"272", + "code":"276", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Conflicts", @@ -5706,8 +5790,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5718,7 +5802,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0004.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"273", + "code":"277", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Names of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Conflicts,User Guide", @@ -5727,8 +5811,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5739,7 +5823,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0043.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0043.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"274", + "code":"278", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"non-empty collection with the same name as the source database,Checking Whether the Destination Data", @@ -5748,8 +5832,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5760,7 +5844,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0071.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0071.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"275", + "code":"279", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL Connections", @@ -5769,8 +5853,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5781,7 +5865,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0017.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0017.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"276", + "code":"280", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Correctly Configured,SSL Connections,User Guide", @@ -5790,8 +5874,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5802,7 +5886,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0042.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0042.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"277", + "code":"281", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL connection,Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Enabled for the Source Database,SSL Connection", @@ -5811,8 +5895,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5823,7 +5907,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0107.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0107.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"278", + "code":"282", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SSL Certificate of the Destination Database Exists,SSL Connections,User Guide", @@ -5832,8 +5916,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5844,7 +5928,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0220.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0220.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"279", + "code":"283", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Object Dependencies", @@ -5853,8 +5937,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5865,7 +5949,7 @@ "uri":"drs_11_0222.html", "node_id":"drs_11_0222.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"280", + "code":"284", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether Referenced Tables Are Selected for Migration,Object Dependencies,User Guide", @@ -5874,8 +5958,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5886,7 +5970,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0488.html", "node_id":"drs_02_0488.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"281", + "code":"285", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Failure Cases", @@ -5895,8 +5979,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5907,7 +5991,7 @@ "uri":"drs_13_0002.html", "node_id":"drs_13_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"282", + "code":"286", "des":"When you migrate full backups from self-built OBS buckets to clouds, the following error message is displayed: restore:null.The possible causes are as follows:Backup file", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,Backup Migration Failed Because Backup Files Cannot Be Found,Failure Cases,User Guide", @@ -5916,8 +6000,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5928,7 +6012,7 @@ "uri":"drs_13_0005.html", "node_id":"drs_13_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"283", + "code":"287", "des":"When you migrate full backups from self-built OBS buckets to clouds, the system displays an error message indicating that the migration failed because the source database", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"the source database cannot be found in the backup files,Backup Migration Failed Because a Backup Dat", @@ -5937,8 +6021,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], @@ -5949,7 +6033,7 @@ "uri":"drs_change_history.html", "node_id":"drs_change_history.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"284", + "code":"288", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Change History,User Guide", @@ -5958,8 +6042,8 @@ { "prodname":"drs", "documenttype":"usermanual", - "IsBot":"Yes", - "IsMulti":"Yes", + "IsBot":"No;Yes", + "IsMulti":"No;Yes", "opensource":"true" } ], diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json b/docs/drs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json index 1932b24e..2bb8e7ec 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json +++ b/docs/drs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json @@ -242,6 +242,15 @@ "p_code":"26", "code":"27" }, + { + "desc":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"From MySQL to DDM", + "uri":"drs_04_0089.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"26", + "code":"28" + }, { "desc":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", "product_code":"drs", @@ -249,7 +258,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0090.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"26", - "code":"28" + "code":"29" }, { "desc":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", @@ -258,7 +267,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0095.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"26", - "code":"29" + "code":"30" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -267,7 +276,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"25", - "code":"30" + "code":"31" }, { "desc":"To start a migration task, the source and destination database users must have permissions listed in the following table. Different types of migration tasks require diffe", @@ -275,8 +284,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"30", - "code":"31" + "p_code":"31", + "code":"32" }, { "desc":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", @@ -284,8 +293,8 @@ "title":"From DDS to MongoDB", "uri":"drs_04_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"30", - "code":"32" + "p_code":"31", + "code":"33" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -294,7 +303,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0490.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"25", - "code":"33" + "code":"34" }, { "desc":"When a task is being started or in the full migration phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.To maintain data co", @@ -302,8 +311,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_03_1117.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"33", - "code":"34" + "p_code":"34", + "code":"35" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -312,7 +321,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"25", - "code":"35" + "code":"36" }, { "desc":"A complete real-time migration consists of creating a migration task, tracking task progress, analyzing migration logs, and comparing data consistency. By comparing multi", @@ -320,8 +329,8 @@ "title":"Step 1: Create a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_02_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"36" + "p_code":"36", + "code":"37" }, { "desc":"The migration progress of a real-time migration task helps you keep track of the status of the migration task.DRS shows the migration progress using a progress bar, helpi", @@ -329,8 +338,8 @@ "title":"Step 2: Query the Migration Progress", "uri":"drs_02_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"37" + "p_code":"36", + "code":"38" }, { "desc":"Migration logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the migration process. This section describes how to view migration logs to locate and ", @@ -338,8 +347,8 @@ "title":"Step 3: View Migration Logs", "uri":"drs_02_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"38" + "p_code":"36", + "code":"39" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to compare migration items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. By comparing migration objects, you ", @@ -347,8 +356,8 @@ "title":"Step 4: Compare Migration Items", "uri":"drs_02_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"39" + "p_code":"36", + "code":"40" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -356,8 +365,8 @@ "title":"Managing Objects", "uri":"drs_03_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"40" + "p_code":"36", + "code":"41" }, { "desc":"During a database migration, accounts need to be migrated separately.During the migration of MySQL databases, there are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts", @@ -365,8 +374,8 @@ "title":"Migrating Accounts", "uri":"drs_09_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"40", - "code":"41" + "p_code":"41", + "code":"42" }, { "desc":"Parameter comparison helps you check consistency between the source and destination database data to ensure your services will not be affected after being migrated.This s", @@ -374,8 +383,8 @@ "title":"Parameters for Comparison", "uri":"drs_08_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"40", - "code":"42" + "p_code":"41", + "code":"43" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -383,8 +392,8 @@ "title":"Task Life Cycle", "uri":"drs_03_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"43" + "p_code":"36", + "code":"44" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to view details about a migration task, including information about the task, replication instance, and migration.You have logged in to the DRS", @@ -392,8 +401,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Task Details", "uri":"drs_04_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"44" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"45" }, { "desc":"After a migration task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask start", @@ -401,8 +410,8 @@ "title":"Editing Migration Task Information", "uri":"drs_04_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"45" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"46" }, { "desc":"During the migration, you may change the password of the source or destination database. As a result, the migration task fails. In this case, you need to change the passw", @@ -410,8 +419,8 @@ "title":"Modifying Connection Information", "uri":"drs_03_1135.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"46" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"47" }, { "desc":"You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration type", @@ -419,8 +428,8 @@ "title":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode", "uri":"drs_03_0046.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"47" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"48" }, { "desc":"For a migration task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the task information, replication ", @@ -428,8 +437,8 @@ "title":"Editing a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"48" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"49" }, { "desc":"A fault may occur during the migration due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space. After the fault is rectified based on the migration log information, y", @@ -437,8 +446,8 @@ "title":"Resuming a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_09_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"49" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"50" }, { "desc":"During the migration, if a migration task fails due to uncertain causes, the background will resume the task several times. However, the task may fail to be recovered in ", @@ -446,8 +455,8 @@ "title":"Resetting a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"50" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"51" }, { "desc":"During migration, if the flow control mode cannot meet the requirements during peak hours, you can pause the migration task.You can pause the following migration tasks:To", @@ -455,8 +464,8 @@ "title":"Pausing a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0109.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"51" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"52" }, { "desc":"After the source database and services are migrated to the destination database, you can stop the migration task. To prevent data from being overwritten after the source ", @@ -464,8 +473,8 @@ "title":"Stopping a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"52" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"53" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to delete a migration task that has been completed or has failed. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution ", @@ -473,8 +482,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"53" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"54" }, { "desc":"Migration statuses indicate different migration phases.Table 1 lists statuses and descriptions of online migration tasks.If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the ta", @@ -482,8 +491,8 @@ "title":"Task Statuses", "uri":"drs_03_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"43", - "code":"54" + "p_code":"44", + "code":"55" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -492,7 +501,7 @@ "uri":"drs_online_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"25", - "code":"55" + "code":"56" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -501,7 +510,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"56" + "code":"57" }, { "desc":"It often becomes necessary to hide the real IP address of your database for the sake of security. Migrating data through direct connections is an option, but costly. DRS ", @@ -509,8 +518,8 @@ "title":"Migration Overview", "uri":"drs_offline_migration.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"56", - "code":"57" + "p_code":"57", + "code":"58" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Backup Migration.This section describes constraints on backup migrations ", @@ -518,8 +527,8 @@ "title":"Creating an RDS Backup Migration Task", "uri":"drs_02_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"56", - "code":"58" + "p_code":"57", + "code":"59" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Backup Migration.This section describes constraints on backup migrations ", @@ -527,8 +536,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Backup Using OBS Buckets", "uri":"drs_02_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"56", - "code":"59" + "p_code":"57", + "code":"60" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -536,8 +545,8 @@ "title":"Task Management", "uri":"drs_04_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"56", - "code":"60" + "p_code":"57", + "code":"61" }, { "desc":"The Basic Information page of a backup migration task displays information about the task, backup files, and databases. This section describes how to view details about c", @@ -545,8 +554,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Task Details", "uri":"drs_04_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"60", - "code":"61" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"62" }, { "desc":"After a backup migration task is created, you can modify basic information about the task to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task na", @@ -554,8 +563,8 @@ "title":"Editing Migration Task Information", "uri":"drs_04_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"60", - "code":"62" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"63" }, { "desc":"Migration logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the migration process. This section describes how to view migration logs to locate and ", @@ -563,8 +572,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Migration Logs", "uri":"drs_04_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"60", - "code":"63" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"64" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to delete a migration task. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution when performing this operation.You hav", @@ -572,8 +581,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_04_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"60", - "code":"64" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"65" }, { "desc":"Migration statuses indicate different migration phases.Table 1 lists statuses and descriptions of backup migration tasks.Deleted migration tasks are not displayed in the ", @@ -581,8 +590,8 @@ "title":"Task Statuses", "uri":"drs_03_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"60", - "code":"65" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"66" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -590,8 +599,8 @@ "title":"Tag Management", "uri":"drs_backup_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"56", - "code":"66" + "p_code":"57", + "code":"67" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -600,7 +609,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"67" + "code":"68" }, { "desc":"DRS real-time synchronization supports multiple topology types. You can plan the topology types as required. For details, see the following content.To ensure data consist", @@ -608,8 +617,8 @@ "title":"Data Synchronization Topologies", "uri":"drs_11_0457.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"67", - "code":"68" + "p_code":"68", + "code":"69" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -617,8 +626,8 @@ "title":"To the Cloud", "uri":"drs_06_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"67", - "code":"69" + "p_code":"68", + "code":"70" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -626,8 +635,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0102.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"69", - "code":"70" + "p_code":"70", + "code":"71" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -635,8 +644,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB Distributed", "uri":"drs_04_0104.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"69", - "code":"71" + "p_code":"70", + "code":"72" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -644,8 +653,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby", "uri":"drs_03_1124.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"69", - "code":"72" + "p_code":"70", + "code":"73" }, { "desc":"Table 2 lists the objects that can be synchronized in different scenarios. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the synchronization.To start a syn", @@ -653,8 +662,8 @@ "title":"From PostgreSQL to PostgreSQL", "uri":"drs_04_0107.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"69", - "code":"73" + "p_code":"70", + "code":"74" }, { "desc":"When a task is being started or in the full synchronization phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.To keep data ", @@ -662,8 +671,17 @@ "title":"From Oracle to PostgreSQL", "uri":"drs_04_0446.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"69", - "code":"74" + "p_code":"70", + "code":"75" + }, + { + "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"From DDM to MySQL", + "uri":"drs_04_0115.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"70", + "code":"76" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -671,8 +689,8 @@ "title":"From DDM to DDM", "uri":"drs_04_0465.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"69", - "code":"75" + "p_code":"70", + "code":"77" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -680,8 +698,8 @@ "title":"Out of the Cloud", "uri":"drs_04_0451.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"67", - "code":"76" + "p_code":"68", + "code":"78" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -689,8 +707,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0117.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"76", - "code":"77" + "p_code":"78", + "code":"79" }, { "desc":"DMS for KafkaYou have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.The s", @@ -698,8 +716,17 @@ "title":"From MySQL to Kafka", "uri":"drs_04_0118.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"76", - "code":"78" + "p_code":"78", + "code":"80" + }, + { + "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"From DDM to MySQL", + "uri":"drs_04_0453.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"78", + "code":"81" }, { "desc":"Table 2 lists the objects that can be synchronized in different scenarios. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the synchronization.Before you sta", @@ -707,8 +734,8 @@ "title":"From GaussDB Distributed to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0121.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"76", - "code":"79" + "p_code":"78", + "code":"82" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -716,8 +743,8 @@ "title":"Between Self-built Databases", "uri":"drs_04_0452.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"67", - "code":"80" + "p_code":"68", + "code":"83" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -725,8 +752,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_03_1118.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"80", - "code":"81" + "p_code":"83", + "code":"84" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.The success of dat", @@ -734,8 +761,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to Kafka", "uri":"drs_04_0128.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"80", - "code":"82" + "p_code":"83", + "code":"85" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -743,8 +770,8 @@ "title":"Task Management", "uri":"drs_TaskMangement.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"67", - "code":"83" + "p_code":"68", + "code":"86" }, { "desc":"A complete real-time synchronization consists of creating a synchronization task, tracking task progress, analyzing synchronization logs, and comparing data consistency. ", @@ -752,8 +779,8 @@ "title":"Step 1: Create a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_06_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"83", - "code":"84" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"87" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to check the synchronization progress.During a full synchronization, DRS displays the progress overview. You can view the structure, data, and ", @@ -761,8 +788,8 @@ "title":"Step 2: Query the Synchronization Progress", "uri":"drs_10_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"83", - "code":"85" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"88" }, { "desc":"Synchronization logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the synchronization process. This section describes how to view synchronization l", @@ -770,8 +797,8 @@ "title":"Step 3: View Synchronization Logs", "uri":"drs_10_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"83", - "code":"86" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"89" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to compare synchronization items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. To minimize the impact on serv", @@ -779,8 +806,8 @@ "title":"Step 4: Compare Synchronization Items", "uri":"drs_10_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"83", - "code":"87" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"90" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -788,8 +815,8 @@ "title":"Managing Objects", "uri":"drs_05_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"83", - "code":"88" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"91" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to change synchronization objects in a synchronization task. After a data synchronization task is created, you can change synchronization objec", @@ -797,8 +824,8 @@ "title":"Editing Synchronization Objects", "uri":"drs_10_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"89" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"92" }, { "desc":"Real-time synchronization supports the import of objects through files. After a task is created, you can import object files on the Set Synchronization Task page.Only Win", @@ -806,8 +833,8 @@ "title":"Importing Synchronization Objects", "uri":"drs_10_0402.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"90" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"93" }, { "desc":"Data synchronization allows you to synchronize objects (including databases, schemas and tables) in a sources database to the corresponding objects in a destination datab", @@ -815,8 +842,8 @@ "title":"Mapping Object Names", "uri":"drs_10_0015.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"91" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"94" }, { "desc":"During real-time synchronization, the objects that can be mapped to the destination include databases, schemas, tables, and columns (in data processing). After a mapping ", @@ -824,8 +851,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Synchronization Mapping Information", "uri":"drs_10_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"92" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"95" }, { "desc":"DRS processes synchronized objects and allows you to add rules for selected objects.After a data filtering rule is added, update the source database to ensure data consis", @@ -833,8 +860,8 @@ "title":"Processing Data", "uri":"drs_03_0035.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"88", - "code":"93" + "p_code":"91", + "code":"96" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -842,8 +869,8 @@ "title":"Task Life Cycle", "uri":"drs_05_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"83", - "code":"94" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"97" }, { "desc":"View the information about the synchronization tasks and synchronization instances. This section describes how to view details about a synchronization task you have creat", @@ -851,8 +878,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Task Details", "uri":"drs_10_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"95" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"98" }, { "desc":"After a synchronization task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask", @@ -860,8 +887,8 @@ "title":"Modifying Task Information", "uri":"drs_10_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"96" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"99" }, { "desc":"A data synchronization task may fail due to the change of the password of the source or destination database. You need to update the information and then retry the synchr", @@ -869,8 +896,8 @@ "title":"Modifying Connection Information", "uri":"drs_10_0016.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"97" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"100" }, { "desc":"You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration type", @@ -878,8 +905,8 @@ "title":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode", "uri":"drs_10_0401.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"98" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"101" }, { "desc":"For a synchronization task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the source and destination d", @@ -887,8 +914,8 @@ "title":"Editing a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"99" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"102" }, { "desc":"A fault may occur during the synchronization due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space. After the fault is rectified based on the synchronization log in", @@ -896,8 +923,8 @@ "title":"Resuming a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0400.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"100" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"103" }, { "desc":"DRS allows you to pause real-time synchronization tasks.The following tasks can be paused during incremental synchronization:To the cloudMySQL->MySQLPostgreSQL->PostgreSQ", @@ -905,8 +932,8 @@ "title":"Pausing a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_03_0110.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"101" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"104" }, { "desc":"During real-time synchronization, you can reset the synchronization tasks in one of the following statuses so that you do not need to configure the tasks again.PausedIncr", @@ -914,8 +941,8 @@ "title":"Resetting a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0300.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"102" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"105" }, { "desc":"After the source database and services are migrated to the destination database, you can stop the synchronization task. To prevent data from being overwritten after the s", @@ -923,8 +950,8 @@ "title":"Stopping a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"103" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"106" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to delete a synchronization task that has been completed or has failed. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise ca", @@ -932,8 +959,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0014.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"104" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"107" }, { "desc":"Synchronization statuses indicate different synchronization phases.", @@ -941,8 +968,8 @@ "title":"Task Statuses", "uri":"drs_06_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"105" + "p_code":"97", + "code":"108" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -950,8 +977,8 @@ "title":"Tag Management", "uri":"drs_synchronization_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"67", - "code":"106" + "p_code":"68", + "code":"109" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -959,8 +986,8 @@ "title":"Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios", "uri":"drs_03_1113.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"67", - "code":"107" + "p_code":"68", + "code":"110" }, { "desc":"Data synchronized to the Kafka cluster is stored in JSON, and JSON-C formats.For details about the JSON format from MySQL to Kafka, see Table 1. Parameters for synchroniz", @@ -968,8 +995,8 @@ "title":"Kafka Message Format", "uri":"drs_03_0052.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"108" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"111" }, { "desc":"No security authentication mode is available. You only need to enter the IP address and port for connection.The SASL mechanism is used to connect to Kafka, and you need t", @@ -977,8 +1004,8 @@ "title":"Kafka Authentication", "uri":"drs_05_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"109" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"112" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to clear the streaming replication slots of the source GaussDB distributed database after the incremental or full+incremental synchronization t", @@ -986,8 +1013,8 @@ "title":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of GaussDB Distributed", "uri":"drs_03_1131.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"110" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"113" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to clear the logical replication slot of the source database, how to synchronize sequence values, and how to reset the sequence values in the d", @@ -995,8 +1022,8 @@ "title":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of PostgreSQL", "uri":"drs_12_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"111" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"114" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to perform real-time synchronization from PostgreSQL to RDS PostgreSQL. You can create triggers and functions in the source database to obtain ", @@ -1004,8 +1031,8 @@ "title":"Creating Triggers and Functions to Implement Incremental DDL Synchronization for PostgreSQL", "uri":"drs_03_0088.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"107", - "code":"112" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"115" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1014,7 +1041,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"113" + "code":"116" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1022,8 +1049,8 @@ "title":"DR Scenarios", "uri":"drs_02_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"113", - "code":"114" + "p_code":"116", + "code":"117" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", @@ -1031,8 +1058,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0122.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"114", - "code":"115" + "p_code":"117", + "code":"118" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", @@ -1040,8 +1067,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby", "uri":"drs_04_0123.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"114", - "code":"116" + "p_code":"117", + "code":"119" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", @@ -1049,8 +1076,8 @@ "title":"From Cassandra to Cassandra", "uri":"drs_04_0125.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"114", - "code":"117" + "p_code":"117", + "code":"120" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1058,8 +1085,8 @@ "title":"Task Management", "uri":"drs_07_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"113", - "code":"118" + "p_code":"116", + "code":"121" }, { "desc":"To prevent service unavailability caused by regional faults, DRS provides disaster recovery to ensure service continuity. If the region where the primary instance is loca", @@ -1067,8 +1094,8 @@ "title":"Step 1: Create a DR Task", "uri":"drs_02_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"118", - "code":"119" + "p_code":"121", + "code":"122" }, { "desc":"After a DR task starts, you can check the DR progress.You have logged in to the DRS console.A DR task has been created and started.On the Disaster Recovery Progress tab, ", @@ -1076,8 +1103,8 @@ "title":"Step 2: Query the DR Progress", "uri":"drs_02_0028.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"118", - "code":"120" + "p_code":"121", + "code":"123" }, { "desc":"DR logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the DR process. This section describes how to view DR logs to locate and analyze database prob", @@ -1085,8 +1112,8 @@ "title":"Step 3: View DR Logs", "uri":"drs_02_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"118", - "code":"121" + "p_code":"121", + "code":"124" }, { "desc":"DR item comparison: You can compare DR items to check data consistency between the service database and DR database. Currently, you can compare the following items during", @@ -1094,8 +1121,8 @@ "title":"Step 4: Compare DR Items", "uri":"drs_02_0033.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"118", - "code":"122" + "p_code":"121", + "code":"125" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1103,8 +1130,8 @@ "title":"Task Life Cycle", "uri":"drs_07_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"118", - "code":"123" + "p_code":"121", + "code":"126" }, { "desc":"After a DR task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask start timeYo", @@ -1112,8 +1139,17 @@ "title":"Editing Subscription Task Information", "uri":"drs_03_1134.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"123", - "code":"124" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"127" + }, + { + "desc":"A data DR task may fail due to the password change of the service or DR database. You need to update the information and then retry the DR task on the DRS console.You can", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"Modifying Connection Information", + "uri":"drs_03_1138.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"126", + "code":"128" }, { "desc":"DRS allows you to change the flow control mode for a task. Currently, only the following DR tasks support this function.MySQL->MySQLMySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/st", @@ -1121,8 +1157,8 @@ "title":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode", "uri":"drs_03_0047.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"123", - "code":"125" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"129" }, { "desc":"For a DR task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the source and destination database detai", @@ -1130,8 +1166,8 @@ "title":"Editing a DR Task", "uri":"drs_03_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"123", - "code":"126" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"130" }, { "desc":"A fault may occur during DR due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space.If a DR task fails due to non-network problems, the system will automatically resu", @@ -1139,8 +1175,8 @@ "title":"Resuming a DR Task", "uri":"drs_03_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"123", - "code":"127" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"131" }, { "desc":"DRS monitors the DB instance performance and the migration progress. With the monitoring information, you can determine the data flow health status, data integrity, and d", @@ -1148,8 +1184,8 @@ "title":"Viewing DR Metrics", "uri":"drs_03_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"123", - "code":"128" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"132" }, { "desc":"DRS supports primary/standby switchover for DR tasks. If both RPO and RTO are 0, data has been completely migrated to the DR database. Then, you can determine whether to ", @@ -1157,8 +1193,8 @@ "title":"Performing a Primary/Standby Switchover for DR Tasks", "uri":"drs_03_1116.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"123", - "code":"129" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"133" }, { "desc":"When the DR task is complete or no longer needed, you can stop the DR task. You can stop a task in any of the following statuses:CreatingConfigurationInitializingDisaster", @@ -1166,8 +1202,8 @@ "title":"Stopping a DR Task", "uri":"drs_03_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"123", - "code":"130" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"134" }, { "desc":"You can delete a DR task, when it is no longer needed Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution when performing this operation.You have", @@ -1175,8 +1211,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a DR Task", "uri":"drs_03_0030.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"123", - "code":"131" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"135" }, { "desc":"DR statuses indicate different DR phases.Table 1 lists DR task statuses and descriptions.If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. Af", @@ -1184,8 +1220,8 @@ "title":"Task Statuses", "uri":"drs_02_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"123", - "code":"132" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"136" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -1193,8 +1229,8 @@ "title":"Tag Management", "uri":"drs_disaster_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"113", - "code":"133" + "p_code":"116", + "code":"137" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1203,7 +1239,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0099.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"134" + "code":"138" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1211,8 +1247,8 @@ "title":"Product Consulting", "uri":"drs_01_0103.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"135" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"139" }, { "desc":"A region and availability zone (AZ) identify the location of a data center. You can create resources in a specific region and AZ.A region is a physical data center. Each ", @@ -1220,8 +1256,8 @@ "title":"What Are Regions and AZs?", "uri":"drs_16_0103.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"135", - "code":"136" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"140" }, { "desc":"DRS is a stable, efficient, and easy-to-use cloud service for database migration and synchronization in real time.It simplifies data migration processes and reduces migra", @@ -1229,8 +1265,8 @@ "title":"What Is DRS?", "uri":"drs_01_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"135", - "code":"137" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"141" }, { "desc":"Yes. DRS provides high availability and can migrate a single RDS instance or RDS primary/standby instances. DRS can automatically rebuild the databases connection after a", @@ -1238,8 +1274,8 @@ "title":"Can DRS Migrate RDS Primary/Standby Instances?", "uri":"drs_01_0105.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"135", - "code":"138" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"142" }, { "desc":"In database migration scenarios, if a migration task fails due to unavoidable problems (such as network fluctuation), DRS records the current parsing and replay point (wh", @@ -1247,8 +1283,8 @@ "title":"Does DRS Support Resumable Uploads?", "uri":"drs_04_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"135", - "code":"139" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"143" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1256,8 +1292,8 @@ "title":"What Are the Differences Between Real-Time Migration, Real-Time DR, and Real-Time Synchronization?", "uri":"drs_04_0087.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"135", - "code":"140" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"144" }, { "desc":"In the full migration phase, DRS uses the row-level parallel migration mode to ensure migration performance and transmission stability. If the source database data is com", @@ -1265,8 +1301,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Solve the Table Bloat Issue?", "uri":"drs_16_1133.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"135", - "code":"141" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"145" }, { "desc":"RDS read replicas cannot be selected on the DRS console. You can select Self-built on ECS and enter the read replica IP address and port number to connect to the instance", @@ -1274,8 +1310,8 @@ "title":"Why Cannot I Select RDS Read Replicas on the DRS Console?", "uri":"drs_16_1142.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"135", - "code":"142" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"146" }, { "desc":"During the initialization of a full migration or synchronization task, DRS needs to query all inventory data in the source database. DRS uses simple SQL statements to que", @@ -1283,8 +1319,8 @@ "title":"How Does DRS Affect the Source and Destination Databases?", "uri":"drs_16_1145.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"135", - "code":"143" + "p_code":"139", + "code":"147" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1292,8 +1328,8 @@ "title":"Network and Security", "uri":"drs_01_0108.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"144" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"148" }, { "desc":"Uses security groups to ensure that the sources of access are trusted.Uses SSL channels to encrypt data during transmission.", @@ -1301,8 +1337,8 @@ "title":"What Security Protection Policies Does DRS Have?", "uri":"drs_01_0109.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"144", - "code":"145" + "p_code":"148", + "code":"149" }, { "desc":"If the network is disconnected during the migration, you can view the task status first. If a full or incremental task fails, click Resume in the Operation column.Full mi", @@ -1310,8 +1346,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do If the Network Is Disconnected During the Migration?", "uri":"drs_01_0110.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"144", - "code":"146" + "p_code":"148", + "code":"150" }, { "desc":"By default, a VPC on the current cloud is isolated from external networks for security reasons. You cannot use an EIP outside a VPC (for example, an EIP of another cloud ", @@ -1319,8 +1355,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Configure a VPC Security Group to Allow Traffic from an EIP?", "uri":"drs_01_0112.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"144", - "code":"147" + "p_code":"148", + "code":"151" }, { "desc":"Before data migration, ensure that network preparations and security rule settings are complete. If the connection is abnormal, check whether the network configuration is", @@ -1328,8 +1364,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do If the Network Connection Between the Replication Instance and Database Is Abnormal?", "uri":"drs_02_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"144", - "code":"148" + "p_code":"148", + "code":"152" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1337,8 +1373,8 @@ "title":"Permissions Management", "uri":"drs_04_0040.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"149" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"153" }, { "desc":"DRS has certain permission requirements on accounts during migration, synchronization, and DR. This section describes the permission requirements on the MySQL engine.You ", @@ -1346,8 +1382,8 @@ "title":"Which MySQL Permissions Are Required for DRS?", "uri":"drs_04_0034.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"149", - "code":"150" + "p_code":"153", + "code":"154" }, { "desc":"mysql -h 'host' -u 'user' -p-N $@ -e \"SELECT CONCAT('SHOW GRANTS FOR ''', user, '''@''', host, ''';') AS query FROM mysql.user\" > /tmp/users.sqlhost indicates the IP add", @@ -1355,8 +1391,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Import Users and Permissions from the Source to the Destination Database?", "uri":"drs_12_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"149", - "code":"151" + "p_code":"153", + "code":"155" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1364,8 +1400,8 @@ "title":"Real-Time Migration", "uri":"drs_04_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"152" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"156" }, { "desc":"You can refer to the following methods to check whether the task can be stopped. Before stopping the task, ensure that:At least one complete data comparison is performed ", @@ -1373,8 +1409,8 @@ "title":"When Can I Stop a Migration Task?", "uri":"drs_01_0104.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"153" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"157" }, { "desc":"Definer is used in views, stored procedures, triggers, and events. Definer does not restrict the permission to invoke objects, instead the permission to access the databa", @@ -1382,8 +1418,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Maintain the Original Service User Permission System After Definer Is Forcibly Converted During MySQL Migration?", "uri":"drs_16_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"154" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"158" }, { "desc":"After the MySQL stored procedure is migrated to the cloud, an error may occur when the stored procedure or function is invoked due to permission problems.The method varie", @@ -1391,8 +1427,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do If the Invoking Permission Problem Occurs After the MySQL Stored Procedure Is Migrated to the Cloud?", "uri":"drs_16_0121.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"155" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"159" }, { "desc":"To ensure that all services on the database are stopped, perform the following steps:", @@ -1400,8 +1436,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Ensure that All Services on the Database Are Stopped?", "uri":"drs_04_0020.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"156" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"160" }, { "desc":"When you use a subaccount to use scheduled task startup function, the account entrustment function must be used. Otherwise, the scheduled task fails to be started, leavin", @@ -1409,8 +1445,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do When Scheduled Task Failed to Start Leaving Message \"can not get agency token\"", "uri":"drs_16_0123.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"157" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"161" }, { "desc":"Currently, RDS for MySQL does not support the MyISAM engine due to the following reasons.MyISAM engine tables do not support transactions and support only table-level loc", @@ -1418,8 +1454,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do If MyISAM Tables Are Not Supported by RDS for MySQL?", "uri":"drs_04_0032.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"158" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"162" }, { "desc":"Based on MySQL 5.7, some new features have been added to MySQL 8.0. There are performance differences between the two versions. Before migration, you need to analyze comp", @@ -1427,8 +1463,8 @@ "title":"What Are the Precautions for Migrating Data from an Earlier Version MySQL to MySQL 8.0?", "uri":"drs_04_0030.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"159" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"163" }, { "desc":"Out of memory (OOM) occurs during the migration from MongoDB to DDS, causing migration failures.The possible causes are as follows:If the mongod service of the source dat", @@ -1436,8 +1472,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do When OOM Occurs During the Migration from MongoDB to DDS?", "uri":"drs_15_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"160" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"164" }, { "desc":"Before using the DRS service to migrate collections between sharded clusters, you must disable the balancer of the collections to be migrated.After the migration is compl", @@ -1445,8 +1481,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Disable the Balancer?", "uri":"drs_16_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"161" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"165" }, { "desc":"During the MySQL to MySQL migration, if the migration log indicates that the migration of events and triggers fails after the migration task is complete, you can manually", @@ -1454,8 +1490,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Export and Import Events and Triggers in Batches?", "uri":"drs_14_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"162" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"166" }, { "desc":"When the value of source database parameter lower_case_table_names is set to 1, the databases or tables whose names contain uppercase letters cannot be migrated.When the ", @@ -1463,8 +1499,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Migrate Databases or Tables Whose Names Contain Uppercase Letters?", "uri":"drs_14_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"163" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"167" }, { "desc":"In a sharded cluster, orphaned documents are those documents on a shard that also exist in chunks on other shards as a result of failed migrations or incomplete migration", @@ -1472,8 +1508,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Delete Orphaned Documents in MongoDB Sharded Clusters?", "uri":"drs_09_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"152", - "code":"164" + "p_code":"156", + "code":"168" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1481,8 +1517,8 @@ "title":"Backup Migration", "uri":"drs_04_0457.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"165" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"169" }, { "desc":"During the backup migration, If Last Backup File is selected by mistake, perform either of the following operations:If you select Yes by mistake, the database receives a ", @@ -1490,8 +1526,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If the Last Backup File Is Incorrectly Selected in the Backup Migration Scenario?", "uri":"drs_04_0041.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"165", - "code":"166" + "p_code":"169", + "code":"170" }, { "desc":"After data is migrated from the local host or VMs to the RDS SQL Server DB instance on the current cloud through DRS, the Login accounts, DBLink, AgentJobs, and key confi", @@ -1499,8 +1535,8 @@ "title":"Manual Configuration", "uri":"drs_04_0458.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"165", - "code":"167" + "p_code":"169", + "code":"171" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1508,8 +1544,8 @@ "title":"Real-Time Synchronization", "uri":"drs_04_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"168" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"172" }, { "desc":"DRS can directly synchronize tables of different schemas to those of the same schema if the tables do not conflict with each other.", @@ -1517,8 +1553,8 @@ "title":"Can DRS Sync Tables of Different Schemas to the Same Schema?", "uri":"drs_16_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"168", - "code":"169" + "p_code":"172", + "code":"173" }, { "desc":"During table-level incremental synchronization from MySQL to MySQL, you can use Online DDL tools to add or delete columns. Pay attention to the following when using Onlin", @@ -1526,8 +1562,8 @@ "title":"Can Online DDL Tools Be Used for Real-time Synchronization?", "uri":"drs_16_1124.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"168", - "code":"170" + "p_code":"172", + "code":"174" }, { "desc":"If the source Oracle database is an RAC cluster, you are advised to use SCAN IP+SERVICE_NAMES to create a task because SCAN IP has stronger fault tolerance, better load b", @@ -1535,8 +1571,8 @@ "title":"Why Do I Use the SCAN IP Address to Connect to an Oracle RAC Cluster?", "uri":"drs_16_1151.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"168", - "code":"171" + "p_code":"172", + "code":"175" }, { "desc":"In physical standby mode, the Oracle database directly replicates logs from the primary database and does not generate any logs. If the source is an Oracle database, you ", @@ -1544,8 +1580,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Check Supplemental Logging of the Source Oracle Database?", "uri":"drs_16_1155.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"168", - "code":"172" + "p_code":"172", + "code":"176" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1553,8 +1589,8 @@ "title":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery", "uri":"drs_04_0028.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"173" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"177" }, { "desc":"Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the difference between the time when a transaction in the current service database is submitted and the time when the transaction", @@ -1562,8 +1598,8 @@ "title":"What Are RPO and RTO of DRS Disaster Recovery?", "uri":"drs_04_0033.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"173", - "code":"174" + "p_code":"177", + "code":"178" }, { "desc":"For real-time DR tasks, if the service database is faulty, manually perform a primary/standby switchover. For details, see Performing a Primary/Standby Switchover for DR ", @@ -1571,8 +1607,8 @@ "title":"Is a Primary/Standby Switchover Triggered Automatically or Manually for DR Tasks?", "uri":"drs_16_1125.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"173", - "code":"175" + "p_code":"177", + "code":"179" }, { "desc":"Real-time DR is performed by instance. You cannot select a specified database, but you can select tables or databases for real-time migration and synchronization task.", @@ -1580,8 +1616,8 @@ "title":"Can Real-Time DR Be Performed for Specified Databases?", "uri":"drs_16_1126.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"173", - "code":"176" + "p_code":"177", + "code":"180" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1589,8 +1625,8 @@ "title":"Data-Level Comparison", "uri":"drs_14_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"177" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"181" }, { "desc":"DRS's data comparison allows you to check whether the data in the source database is the same as that in the destination database.DRS does not support value comparison fo", @@ -1598,8 +1634,8 @@ "title":"Which of the Following Data Types Are Not Supported By Value Comparison?", "uri":"drs_16_1130.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"177", - "code":"178" + "p_code":"181", + "code":"182" }, { "desc":"Object comparison: System tables of the source and destination databases are queried, occupying about 10 sessions. The database is not affected. However, if there are a l", @@ -1607,8 +1643,8 @@ "title":"What Impact Does a DRS Comparison Task Have on Databases?", "uri":"drs_16_1161.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"177", - "code":"179" + "p_code":"181", + "code":"183" }, { "desc":"Object comparison: Generally, the comparison results are returned within several minutes based on the query performance of the source database. If the amount of data is l", @@ -1616,8 +1652,8 @@ "title":"How Long Does a DRS Comparison Task Take?", "uri":"drs_16_1162.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"177", - "code":"180" + "p_code":"181", + "code":"184" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1625,8 +1661,8 @@ "title":"General Operations", "uri":"drs_04_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"181" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"185" }, { "desc":"Information often overlaps when you decrease the size of the page. You are advised to set the page scale at 100%.", @@ -1634,8 +1670,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do When Information Overlaps on the DRS Console?", "uri":"drs_15_0120.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"182" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"186" }, { "desc":"During the migration, the destination instance can be set to read-only or read/write.Read-only: During the migration, the destination instance is read-only. After the mig", @@ -1643,8 +1679,8 @@ "title":"Is the Destination Instance Set to Read-only or Read/Write?", "uri":"drs_04_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"183" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"187" }, { "desc":"During migration for MySQL databases, the source database binlog must be in the ROW format. Otherwise, the task fails. After binlog_format=ROW at the global level is set ", @@ -1652,8 +1688,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Set Global binlog_format=ROW to Take Effect Immediately?", "uri":"drs_16_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"184" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"188" }, { "desc":"When migrating MySQL databases, ensure that the binlog_row_image parameter of the source database is set to FULL. Otherwise, the migration task will fail. After binlog_ro", @@ -1661,8 +1697,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Set binlog_row_image=FULL to Take Effect Immediately?", "uri":"drs_16_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"185" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"189" }, { "desc":"When you set the password for the migration account in the destination database, you need to set the password based on the password strength requirements of the destinati", @@ -1670,8 +1706,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Change the Destination Database Password to Meet the Password Policy?", "uri":"drs_14_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"186" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"190" }, { "desc":"MongoDB shards data at the collection level, distributing the collection data using shard keys.You choose the shard key when sharding a collection. Each record contains a", @@ -1679,8 +1715,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Configure the Shard Key for a MongoDB Sharded Cluster?", "uri":"drs_14_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"187" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"191" }, { "desc":"When the cloud connection bandwidth is expanded, the bandwidth link needs to be re-established and the network is disconnected. Whether the network disconnection affects ", @@ -1688,8 +1724,8 @@ "title":"Does Bandwidth Expansion Affect the Running DRS Tasks?", "uri":"drs_16_0102.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"188" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"192" }, { "desc":"In some MariaDB versions, the SysDB database is used as a system database (similar to the sys database of MySQL 5.7). Therefore, DRS considers the SysDB database as the s", @@ -1697,8 +1733,8 @@ "title":"Why Data in MariaDB and SysDB Cannot Be Migrated?", "uri":"drs_16_0122.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"189" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"193" }, { "desc":"DRS supports many-to-one scenarios during migration of different types of instances and tables to suit your service requirements.To ensure that there is sufficient space ", @@ -1706,8 +1742,8 @@ "title":"Constraints and Operation Suggestions on Many-to-One Scenario", "uri":"drs_16_0120.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"190" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"194" }, { "desc":"You can view DRS operation logs on the Cloud Trace Service (CTS) console.Click the username in the upper right corner and select Operation Log from the drop-down list.", @@ -1715,8 +1751,8 @@ "title":"Where Can I View DRS Operation Logs?", "uri":"drs_01_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"191" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"195" }, { "desc":"No. DRS cannot restart a completed task.", @@ -1724,8 +1760,8 @@ "title":"Can a Completed Task Be Restarted?", "uri":"drs_16_1140.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"192" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"196" }, { "desc":"You can reset a task when the task is suspended or fails. Resetting a task does not clear the destination database. You can determine whether to clear the destination dat", @@ -1733,8 +1769,8 @@ "title":"What Are the Differences Between Resetting a Task and Recreating a Task?", "uri":"drs_16_1143.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"193" + "p_code":"185", + "code":"197" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1742,8 +1778,8 @@ "title":"Delay", "uri":"drs_16_1156.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"194" + "p_code":"138", + "code":"198" }, { "desc":"Recovery Time Objective (RTO) is duration of time within which transactions on the DRS instance are transmitted and replayed to the destination database during incrementa", @@ -1751,8 +1787,8 @@ "title":"Why Does the Delay of DR Tasks Increase?", "uri":"drs_16_1148.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"194", - "code":"195" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"199" }, { "desc":"Migration from MongoDB to DDSMigration from DDS to MongoDBTo ensure the performance of migration, synchronization, or disaster recovery, DRS performs concurrent replay at", @@ -1760,8 +1796,8 @@ "title":"Why Is the Delay High In Migration from MongoDB to DDS?", "uri":"drs_16_1157.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"194", - "code":"196" + "p_code":"198", + "code":"200" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1770,7 +1806,7 @@ "uri":"drs_13_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"197" + "code":"201" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1778,8 +1814,8 @@ "title":"Solutions to Failed Check Items", "uri":"drs_11_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"197", - "code":"198" + "p_code":"201", + "code":"202" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1787,8 +1823,8 @@ "title":"Disk Space", "uri":"drs_12_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"199" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"203" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1796,8 +1832,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has Sufficient Storage Space", "uri":"drs_11_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"199", - "code":"200" + "p_code":"203", + "code":"204" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1805,8 +1841,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Server Has Sufficient Storage Space", "uri":"drs_11_0076.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"199", - "code":"201" + "p_code":"203", + "code":"205" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1814,8 +1850,8 @@ "title":"Database Parameters", "uri":"drs_12_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"202" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"206" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1823,8 +1859,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Enabled", "uri":"drs_11_0014.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"203" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"207" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1832,8 +1868,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Row-Based", "uri":"drs_11_0015.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"204" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"208" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1841,8 +1877,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Binlog Retention Period Is Set on the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0016.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"205" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"209" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1850,8 +1886,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Character Sets Are Consistent", "uri":"drs_11_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"206" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"210" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1859,8 +1895,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database server_id Meets the Incremental Migration Requirements", "uri":"drs_11_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"207" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"211" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1868,8 +1904,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Table Names Are Consistent in Case Sensitivity", "uri":"drs_11_0019.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"208" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"212" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1877,8 +1913,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Object Names with Non-ASCII Characters", "uri":"drs_11_0022.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"209" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"213" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1886,8 +1922,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the TIME_ZONE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"210" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"214" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1895,8 +1931,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the COLLATION_SERVER Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"211" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"215" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1904,8 +1940,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SERVER_UUID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"212" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"216" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1913,8 +1949,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SERVER_ID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are Different", "uri":"drs_11_0044.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"213" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"217" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1922,8 +1958,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Invalid sql_mode Values", "uri":"drs_11_0049.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"214" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"218" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1931,8 +1967,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SQL_MODE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0059.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"215" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"219" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1940,8 +1976,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the sql_mode Value in the Destination Database Is Not NO_ENGINE_SUBSTITUTION", "uri":"drs_11_0228.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"216" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"220" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1949,8 +1985,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the innodb_strict_mode Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0060.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"217" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"221" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1958,8 +1994,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the max_wal_senders Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured", "uri":"drs_11_0053.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"218" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"222" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1967,8 +2003,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the WAL_LEVEL Value in the Source Database Is Correct", "uri":"drs_11_0054.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"219" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"223" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1976,8 +2012,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the MAX_REPLICATION_SLOTS Value in the Source Database Is Correct", "uri":"drs_11_0055.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"220" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"224" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1985,8 +2021,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is on Standby", "uri":"drs_11_0056.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"221" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"225" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1994,8 +2030,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the log_slave_updates Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured", "uri":"drs_11_0061.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"222" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"226" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2003,8 +2039,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the BLOCK_SIZE Value of the Source Database Is the Same as That of the Destination Database", "uri":"drs_11_0063.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"223" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"227" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2012,8 +2048,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the binlog_row_image Value is FULL", "uri":"drs_11_0064.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"224" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"228" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2021,8 +2057,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Transaction Isolation Levels are Consistent", "uri":"drs_11_0453.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"225" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"229" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2030,8 +2066,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the lc_monetary Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0038.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"226" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"230" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2039,8 +2075,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Trigger Names with Non-ASCII Characters", "uri":"drs_11_0073.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"227" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"231" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2048,8 +2084,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Collections Contain More Than 10 Indexes", "uri":"drs_11_0200.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"228" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"232" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2057,8 +2093,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in Both the Source and Destination Databases", "uri":"drs_11_0227.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"229" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"233" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2066,8 +2102,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in the Destination Database", "uri":"drs_11_0225.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"230" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"234" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2075,8 +2111,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the max_allowed_packet Value of the Destination Database Is too Small", "uri":"drs_15_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"231" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"235" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2084,8 +2120,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Character Set Is Supported", "uri":"drs_03_043.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"232" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"236" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2093,8 +2129,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Databases and Tables Exist", "uri":"drs_03_045.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"233" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"237" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2102,8 +2138,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether session_replication_role of the Destination Database Is correctly Set", "uri":"drs_03_1130.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"234" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"238" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2111,8 +2147,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the MongoDB Instance Type Matches the Migration Mode", "uri":"drs_11_0066.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"235" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"239" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2120,8 +2156,8 @@ "title":"Checking the Physical Standby Database", "uri":"drs_11_0465.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"236" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"240" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2129,8 +2165,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Values of group_concat_max_len Are Consistent", "uri":"drs_11_0469.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"237" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"241" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2138,8 +2174,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Character Sets Are Compatible", "uri":"drs_11_0471.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"238" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"242" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2147,8 +2183,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Unsupported Table Field Types", "uri":"drs_11_0481.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"239" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"243" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2156,8 +2192,8 @@ "title":"Checking Replication Attribute of Primary Key Columns", "uri":"drs_11_0482.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"202", - "code":"240" + "p_code":"206", + "code":"244" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2165,8 +2201,8 @@ "title":"Source DB Instance Statuses", "uri":"drs_11_0464.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"241" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"245" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2174,8 +2210,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Databases Are of the Same Type", "uri":"drs_11_0046.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"241", - "code":"242" + "p_code":"245", + "code":"246" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2183,8 +2219,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the ChangeStream API of the source DB instance is available", "uri":"drs_11_0463.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"241", - "code":"243" + "p_code":"245", + "code":"247" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2192,8 +2228,8 @@ "title":"Destination DB Instance Statuses", "uri":"drs_12_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"244" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"248" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2201,8 +2237,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Involved in Another Migration Task", "uri":"drs_11_0011.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"245" + "p_code":"248", + "code":"249" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2210,8 +2246,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has a Read Replica", "uri":"drs_11_0050.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"246" + "p_code":"248", + "code":"250" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2219,8 +2255,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Extensions Are Supported", "uri":"drs_11_0041.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"247" + "p_code":"248", + "code":"251" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2228,8 +2264,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether Destination Contains the Configured Database", "uri":"drs_11_0075.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"248" + "p_code":"248", + "code":"252" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2237,8 +2273,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination DB Instance Is Available", "uri":"drs_11_0230.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"244", - "code":"249" + "p_code":"248", + "code":"253" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2246,8 +2282,8 @@ "title":"Database User Permissions", "uri":"drs_12_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"250" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"254" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2255,8 +2291,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database User Has Sufficient Permissions", "uri":"drs_11_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"250", - "code":"251" + "p_code":"254", + "code":"255" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2264,8 +2300,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database User Has Sufficient Permissions", "uri":"drs_11_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"250", - "code":"252" + "p_code":"254", + "code":"256" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2273,8 +2309,8 @@ "title":"Database Versions", "uri":"drs_12_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"253" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"257" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2282,8 +2318,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Version Is Supported", "uri":"drs_11_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"253", - "code":"254" + "p_code":"257", + "code":"258" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2291,8 +2327,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Version Is Supported", "uri":"drs_11_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"253", - "code":"255" + "p_code":"257", + "code":"259" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2300,8 +2336,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Migration Is from an Earlier Database Version to the Same or a Later Version", "uri":"drs_11_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"253", - "code":"256" + "p_code":"257", + "code":"260" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2309,8 +2345,8 @@ "title":"Networks", "uri":"drs_12_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"257" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"261" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2318,8 +2354,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is Connected", "uri":"drs_precheck.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"257", - "code":"258" + "p_code":"261", + "code":"262" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2327,8 +2363,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Connected", "uri":"drs_11_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"257", - "code":"259" + "p_code":"261", + "code":"263" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2336,8 +2372,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Can Connect to the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"257", - "code":"260" + "p_code":"261", + "code":"264" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2345,8 +2381,8 @@ "title":"Database Objects", "uri":"drs_11_0067.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"261" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"265" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2354,8 +2390,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains a MyISAM Table", "uri":"drs_11_0048.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"261", - "code":"262" + "p_code":"265", + "code":"266" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2363,8 +2399,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains the Functions or Stored Procedures that the Source Database User Is Not Authorized to Migrate", "uri":"drs_11_0080.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"261", - "code":"263" + "p_code":"265", + "code":"267" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2372,8 +2408,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Use Storage Engines Not Supported by the Destination Database", "uri":"drs_11_0117.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"261", - "code":"264" + "p_code":"265", + "code":"268" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2381,8 +2417,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Contain Primary Keys", "uri":"drs_15_0020.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"261", - "code":"265" + "p_code":"265", + "code":"269" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2390,8 +2426,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Triggers or Events", "uri":"drs_15_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"261", - "code":"266" + "p_code":"265", + "code":"270" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2399,8 +2435,8 @@ "title":"Database Configuration Items", "uri":"drs_11_0068.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"267" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"271" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2408,8 +2444,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Name Is Valid", "uri":"drs_11_0045.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"267", - "code":"268" + "p_code":"271", + "code":"272" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2417,8 +2453,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Table Name Is Valid", "uri":"drs_11_0105.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"267", - "code":"269" + "p_code":"271", + "code":"273" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2426,8 +2462,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database View Name Is Valid", "uri":"drs_11_0072.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"267", - "code":"270" + "p_code":"271", + "code":"274" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2435,8 +2471,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Shard Key Can Be Obtained from the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0069.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"267", - "code":"271" + "p_code":"271", + "code":"275" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2444,8 +2480,8 @@ "title":"Conflicts", "uri":"drs_11_0070.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"272" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"276" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2453,8 +2489,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Names of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"272", - "code":"273" + "p_code":"276", + "code":"277" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2462,8 +2498,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Contains a Non-Empty Collection with the Same Name As the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0043.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"272", - "code":"274" + "p_code":"276", + "code":"278" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2471,8 +2507,8 @@ "title":"SSL Connections", "uri":"drs_11_0071.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"275" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"279" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2480,8 +2516,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Correctly Configured", "uri":"drs_11_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"275", - "code":"276" + "p_code":"279", + "code":"280" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2489,8 +2525,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Enabled for the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0042.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"275", - "code":"277" + "p_code":"279", + "code":"281" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2498,8 +2534,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SSL Certificate of the Destination Database Exists", "uri":"drs_11_0107.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"275", - "code":"278" + "p_code":"279", + "code":"282" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2507,8 +2543,8 @@ "title":"Object Dependencies", "uri":"drs_11_0220.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"198", - "code":"279" + "p_code":"202", + "code":"283" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2516,8 +2552,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether Referenced Tables Are Selected for Migration", "uri":"drs_11_0222.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"279", - "code":"280" + "p_code":"283", + "code":"284" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2525,8 +2561,8 @@ "title":"Failure Cases", "uri":"drs_02_0488.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"197", - "code":"281" + "p_code":"201", + "code":"285" }, { "desc":"When you migrate full backups from self-built OBS buckets to clouds, the following error message is displayed: restore:null.The possible causes are as follows:Backup file", @@ -2534,8 +2570,8 @@ "title":"Backup Migration Failed Because Backup Files Cannot Be Found", "uri":"drs_13_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"281", - "code":"282" + "p_code":"285", + "code":"286" }, { "desc":"When you migrate full backups from self-built OBS buckets to clouds, the system displays an error message indicating that the migration failed because the source database", @@ -2543,8 +2579,8 @@ "title":"Backup Migration Failed Because a Backup Database Cannot Be Found in the Backup Files", "uri":"drs_13_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"281", - "code":"283" + "p_code":"285", + "code":"287" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2553,6 +2589,6 @@ "uri":"drs_change_history.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"284" + "code":"288" } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0002.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0002.html index 1b343fe5..6535bb14 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0002.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0002.html @@ -265,10 +265,10 @@

Migrate Account

During a database migration, accounts need to be migrated separately.

-
There are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts whose permissions need to be reduced, and accounts that cannot be migrated. You can choose whether to migrate the accounts based on service requirements. If you select Yes, you can select the accounts to be migrated as required.
-

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    Table 8 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0027.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0027.html index 436944fc..a8cd74ee 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0027.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0027.html @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@
    • If the check is complete and the check success rate is 100%, go to the Compare Parameter page.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and DR instance details. Then, click Submit.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and DR instance details. Then, click Submit.

    @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0026.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0026.html index 3aec47e4..cd4dc691 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0026.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0026.html @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
    • If the check is complete and the check success rate is 100%, go to the Compare Parameter page.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and DR instance details. Then, click Submit.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and DR instance details. Then, click Submit.

    • Table 9 Task and recipient description

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0002.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0002.html index 94167bcf..43e079b9 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0002.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0002.html @@ -29,10 +29,10 @@

    Migrate Account

    During a database migration, accounts need to be migrated separately.

    -
    There are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts whose permissions need to be reduced, and accounts that cannot be migrated. You can choose whether to migrate the accounts based on service requirements. If you select Yes, you can select the accounts to be migrated as required.
    • Yes

      If you need to migrate accounts, see Migrating Accounts.

      +
      There are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts whose permissions need to be reduced, and accounts that cannot be migrated. You can choose whether to migrate the accounts based on service requirements. If you select Yes, you can select the accounts to be migrated as required.
      -
      • No

        During migration, accounts, permissions, and passwords are not migrated.

        +
        • No

          During migration, accounts, permissions, and passwords are not migrated.

    You can choose to migrate all objects, tables, or databases based on your service requirements.

    • All: All objects in the source database are migrated to the destination database. After the migration, the object names will remain the same as those in the source database and cannot be modified.
    • Tables: The selected table-level objects will be migrated.
    • Databases: The selected database-level objects will be migrated.

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    -
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    +
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    Table 1 Task and recipient description

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0035.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0035.html index f87ad51c..d7cc1179 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0035.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0035.html @@ -8,17 +8,6 @@

  • After the verification is successful, click Generate Processing Rule. The rule is displayed.
  • Click Next.
    • -

    Advanced Settings for Data Filtering

    If you need to query an association table, you can use the advanced settings of data processing.

    -
    1. In the Object area of the Data filtering page, select the table to be processed.
    2. In the Filtering Criteria area, specify the filtering criteria, for example, id1 in (select id from db1.tab1 where id >=3 and id <10), and click Verify.

      • Each table has only one verification rule.
      • Up to 500 tables can be filtered at a time.
      • The filter expression cannot use the package, function, variable, or constant of a specific DB engine. It must comply with the general SQL standard. Enter the part following WHERE in the SQL statement (excluding WHERE and semicolons), for example, sid > 3 and sname like "G %". A maximum of 512 characters are allowed.
      • Filter criteria cannot be configured for large objects, such as CLOB, BLOB, and BYTEA.
      • You are not advised to set filter criteria for fields of approximate numeric types, such as FLOAT, DECIMAL, and DOUBLE.
      • Do not use fields containing special characters as a filter condition.
      • You are not advised to use non-idempotent expressions or functions as data processing conditions, such as SYSTIMESTAMP and SYSDATE, because the returned result may be different each time the function is called.
      -
      -

    3. After the verification is successful, click Generate Processing Rule. The rule is displayed.
    4. In the Advanced Settings area, specify the configuration condition and rule for the association table to help you filter data.

      1. In the Configuration Condition area, enter the association table information entered in 2.

        Database Name, Table Name, Column Name, Primary Key, Index, and Filter Criteria are mandatory. If the table does not have an index, enter its primary key.

        -

        Filter Criteria is the filter condition of the association table information entered in 2.

        -
      2. Then, click Verify.
      3. After the verification is successful, click Generate Configuration Rule. The rule is displayed in the Configuration Rule area.

        To filter data in multiple association tables, repeat 4.

        -

        Configuration rules can be deleted.

        -
        -
      -

    5. Click Next.
    -

    Viewing Data Filtering Results

    1. In the task list, click the task to be processed.
    2. Click the Process Data tab to view data filtering records. Click in the upper right corner to refresh the record list.
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1117.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1117.html index ab48d421..279f9cef 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1117.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1117.html @@ -304,14 +304,14 @@

    You can choose to migrate all objects, tables, or databases based on your service requirements.

    • All: All objects in the source database are migrated to the destination database. After the migration, the object names will remain the same as those in the source database and cannot be modified.
    • Tables: The selected table-level objects will be migrated.
    • Databases: The selected database-level objects will be migrated.

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    -
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    +
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    Table 9 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 10 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1118.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1118.html index aa9200de..5ab5bf97 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1118.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1118.html @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@

    Select Tables, Databases, or Import object file as required.

    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    -
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    +
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 8 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1124.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1124.html index 435447ed..f5a58276 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1124.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1124.html @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@
    • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

      If the database table name contains characters other than letters, digits, and underscores (_), or the mapped database table name contains hyphens (-) and number signs (#), the name length cannot exceed 42 characters.

    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    -
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    +
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ @@ -422,7 +422,7 @@ -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 8 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1138.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1138.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c540eaca --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_1138.html @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ + + +

    Modifying Connection Information

    +

    A data DR task may fail due to the password change of the service or DR database. You need to update the information and then retry the DR task on the DRS console.

    +

    You can modify the following information:

    +
    • Source database password
    • Destination database password

      After the preceding information is changed, the change takes effect immediately, and the data in the DR database is not cleared.

      +
      +
    +

    Prerequisites

    You have logged in to the DRS console.

    +
    +

    Procedure

    1. On the Disaster Recovery Management page, click the target DR task in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. On the Basic Information page, click Modify Connection Details in the DR Information area.
    3. In the displayed dialog box, change the passwords of the source and destination databases and click OK.
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: Task Life Cycle
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0002.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0002.html index cdddeeb3..c3939986 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0002.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0002.html @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@

    The Basic Information page of a backup migration task displays information about the task, backup files, and databases. This section describes how to view details about current migration task.

    Prerequisites

    You have logged in to the DRS console.

    -

    Procedure

    In the task list, only tasks created by the current login user are displayed. Tasks created by different users of the same tenant are not displayed.

    +

    Procedure

    • In the task list, only tasks created by the current login user are displayed. Tasks created by different users of the same tenant are not displayed.
    1. On the Backup Migration Management page, click the target migration task name in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. On the displayed Basic Information tab, view details about the migration task.

      You can view information about the task, backup files, and databases.

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0005.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0005.html index b54a1d00..0e498c47 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0005.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0005.html @@ -4,9 +4,9 @@

    This section describes how to view details about a migration task, including information about the task, replication instance, and migration.

    Prerequisites

    • You have logged in to the DRS console.
    • A migration task has been created.
    -

    Procedure

    In the task list, only tasks created by the current login user are displayed. Tasks created by different users of the same tenant are not displayed.

    +

    Procedure

    • In the task list, only tasks created by the current login user are displayed. Tasks created by different users of the same tenant are not displayed.
    • For a task whose source database is MySQL Schema and Logic Table or DDM, the task details of each subtask contain the information about the source and destination databases corresponding to the subtask.
    -
    1. On the Online Migration Management page, click the target migration task name in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. On the displayed Basic Information tab, view details about the migration task.

      You can view information about the task, replication instance, and migration.

      +
      1. On the Online Migration Management page, click the target migration task name in the Task Name/ID column.
      2. On the displayed Basic Information tab, view details about the migration task.

        You can view information about the task, replication instance, and migration.

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0088.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0088.html index 8eb9e97f..24ef8598 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0088.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0088.html @@ -379,10 +379,10 @@

    Migrate Account

    During a database migration, accounts need to be migrated separately.

    -
    There are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts whose permissions need to be reduced, and accounts that cannot be migrated. You can choose whether to migrate the accounts based on service requirements. If you select Yes, you can select the accounts to be migrated as required.
    • Yes

      If you need to migrate accounts, see Migrating Accounts.

      +
      There are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts whose permissions need to be reduced, and accounts that cannot be migrated. You can choose whether to migrate the accounts based on service requirements. If you select Yes, you can select the accounts to be migrated as required.
      -
      • No

        During migration, accounts, permissions, and passwords are not migrated.

        +
        • No

          During migration, accounts, permissions, and passwords are not migrated.

    You can choose to migrate all objects, tables, or databases based on your service requirements.

    • All: All objects in the source database are migrated to the destination database. After the migration, the object names will remain the same as those in the source database and cannot be modified.
    • Tables: The selected table-level objects will be migrated.
    • Databases: The selected database-level objects will be migrated.

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    -
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    +
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@
    • If the check is complete and the check success rate is 100%, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 12 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0089.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0089.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a16226c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0089.html @@ -0,0 +1,331 @@ + + +

    From MySQL to DDM

    +

    Supported Source and Destination Databases

    +
    + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Supported databases

    Source DB

    +

    Destination DB

    +
    • On-premises databases (MySQL 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, and 8.0)
    • ECS databases (MySQL 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, and 8.0)
    • Other cloud databases (MySQL 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, and 8.0)
    • RDS for MySQL (5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 8.0)
    +
    • DDM instances
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Supported Migration Objects

    Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migration.

    + +
    + + + + + + + +
    Table 2 Migration objects

    Type

    +

    Precautions

    +

    Migration objects

    +
    • Migration object level: table level
    • Supported migration objects:
      • Only the source database data can be migrated. The table structure and other database objects of the source database cannot be migrated.
      • The system database and event statuses cannot be migrated.
      • Tables with storage engine different to MyISAM and InnoDB tables cannot be migrated.
      • Tables without primary keys cannot be migrated.
      • Cascade operations cannot be performed on tables with foreign keys.
      +
      NOTE:

      The objects that can be migrated have the following constraints:

      +
      • The names of the source databases and tables cannot contain non-ASCII characters, or special characters <'>`/\"
      • The source database name cannot start with ib_logfile and cannot be ib_buffer_pool, ib_doublewrite, ibdata1 or ibtmp1.
      +
      +
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Database Account Permission Requirements

    To start a migration task, the source and destination database users must have permissions listed in the following table. Different types of migration tasks require different permissions. For details, see Table 3. DRS automatically checks the database account permissions in the pre-check phase and provides handling suggestions.

    + +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 3 Database account permission

    Type

    +

    Full Migration

    +

    Full+Incremental Migration

    +

    Source database user

    +

    The user must have the following minimum permissions:

    +

    SELECT, SHOW VIEW, and EVENT

    +

    The user must have the following minimum permissions:

    +

    SELECT, SHOW VIEW, EVENT, LOCK TABLES, REPLICATION SLAVE, and REPLICATION CLIENT

    +

    Destination database user

    +
    • The DDM destination database user must have the following permissions: CREATE, DROP, ALTER, INDEX, INSERT, DELETE, UPDATE, and SELECT. In addition, grant the SELECT permission on all tables.
    • The DDM destination database user must have the permission on the database to be migrated.
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Suggestions

    • When a task is being started or in the full migration phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.
    • To maintain data consistency before and after the migration, do not write data to the source and destination databases in the full migration mode. In the full+incremental migration mode, you can continue the migration while data is still being written to the source database.
    +
    +
    • The success of database migration depends on environment and manual operations. To ensure a smooth migration, perform a migration trial before you start the migration to help you detect and resolve problems in advance.
    • Start your migration task during off-peak hours. A less active database is easier to migrate successfully. If the data is fairly static, there is less likely to be any severe performance impacts during the migration.
      • If network bandwidth is not limited, the query rate of the source database increases by about 50 MB/s during full migration, and two to four CPUs are occupied.
      +
      • The data being migrated may be locked by other transactions for a long period of time, resulting in read timeout.
      • Due to the inherent characteristics of MySQL, in certain scenarios the performance may be negatively affected. For example, if the CPU resources are insufficient and the storage engine is TokuDB, the read speed on tables may be decreased by 10%.
      • If DRS concurrently reads data from a database, it will use about 6 to 10 sessions. The impact of the connections on services must be considered.
      • If you read a table, especially a large table, during the full migration, the exclusive lock on that table may be blocked.
      +
    • Data-Level Comparison

      To obtain accurate comparison results, start data comparison at a specified time point during off-peak hours. If it is needed, select Start at a specified time for Comparison Time. Due to slight time difference and continuous operations on data, data inconsistency may occur, reducing the reliability and validity of the comparison results.

      +
    +
    +

    Precautions

    The full+incremental migration process consists of four phases: task startup, full synchronization, incremental synchronization, and task completion. A single full migration task contains three phases. To ensure smooth migration, read the following precautions before creating a migration task.

    + +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 4 Precautions

    Type

    +

    Restrictions

    +

    Starting a task

    +
    • Source database requirements:
      • The binlog of the source database must be enabled and use the row-based format during incremental migration.
      • If the storage space is sufficient, store the source database binlogs for as long as possible. The recommended retention period is three days.
      • If the expire_logs_days value of the source database is set to 0, the migration may fail. Set expire_logs_day to a proper value to ensure that the binlog does not expire before data transfer resumes. This ensures that services can be recovered after interruption.
      • During an incremental migration, the server_id value of the MySQL source database must be set. If the source database version is MySQL 5.6 or earlier, the server_id value ranges from 2 to 4294967296. If the source database is MySQL 5.7 or later, the server_id value ranges from 1 to 4294967296.
      • Enable skip-name-resolve for the source database to reduce the possibility of connection timeout.
      • Enable GTID for the source database. If GTID is not enabled for the source database, primary/standby switchover is not supported. DRS tasks will be interrupted and cannot be restored during a switchover.
      • The log_slave_updates parameter of the source database must be enabled. Otherwise, the migration fails.
      • The binlog_row_image parameter value of the source database must be FULL. Otherwise, the migration fails.
      +
    • Source database object requirements:
      • If the source database is an on-premises database and has Percona Server for MySQL 5.6.x or Percona Server for MySQL 5.7.x installed, the memory manager must use Jemalloc to prevent Out of Memory errors caused by frequent queries on system tables.
      • The source database does not support the reset master or reset master to command, which may cause DRS task failures or data inconsistency.
      +
    • Destination database parameter requirements:
      • The destination DB instance and associated RDS DB instance must be available. If the RDS DB instance type is primary/standby, the replication status must be normal.
      • The associated RDS DB instance must have sufficient storage space.
      • The character set of the associated RDS database must be the same as that of the source database.
      • The AUTO_INCREMENT value of a table in the destination cannot be less than that of a table in the source.
      +
    • Destination database object requirements:
      • To migrate table structures and other objects, you need to create table structures and indexes in the destination database based on table structures of the source schema. Objects that are not created in the destination database are not to be migrated.
      • The table structure created in the destination database must be the same as that in the source database.
      • Ensure that the destination database is empty before starting the migration. Otherwise, data in the destination may be overwritten during incremental migration.
      • If the destination DB instance uses columns of the TIMESTAMP or DATETIME data type as its sharding key, the seconds precision of the column is removed after the migration.
      +
    • Other notes:
      • If the data types are incompatible, the migration may fail.
      • If the source DB instance is an RDS MySQL instance, tables encrypted using Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) cannot be synchronized.
      • If the source MySQL database does not support TLS 1.2 or is a self-built database of an earlier version (earlier than 5.6.46 or between 5.7 and 5.7.28), you need to submit an O&M application for testing the SSL connection.
      +
    +

    Full migration

    +
    • During task startup and full migration, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.
    • During migration, do not modify or delete the usernames, passwords, permissions, or ports of the source and destination databases.
    • During migration, do not modify the destination database (including but not limited to DDL and DML operations) that is being migrated.
    • During migration, do not clear the binlog in the source database.
    • During migration, do not create a database named ib_logfile in the source database.
    +

    Incremental migration

    +
    • During migration, do not modify or delete the usernames, passwords, permissions, or ports of the source and destination databases.
    • During migration, do not modify the destination database (including but not limited to DDL and DML operations) that is being migrated.
    • During migration, do not clear the binlog in the source database.
    • During migration, do not create a database named ib_logfile in the source database.
    • During an incremental migration of table-level objects, renaming tables is not supported.
    • During an incremental migration, do not perform the point-in-time recovery (PITR) operation on the source database.
    • During an incremental migration, resumable upload is supported. However, data may be repeatedly inserted into a non-transactional table that does not have a primary key when the server system breaks down.
    +

    Stopping a task

    +
    • If the target DDM version is later than 3.0.4.1, DRS automatically updates the start value of the DDM sequence when the task is complete.
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Prerequisites

    • You have logged in to the DRS console.
    • For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time migration, see Real-Time Migration.
    + +
    +

    Procedure

    1. On the Create Replication Instance page, configure task details, description, and the replication instance, and click Next.

      • Task information description +
        + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
        Table 5 Task information

        Parameter

        +

        Description

        +

        Region

        +

        The region where the replication instance is deployed. You can change the region. To reduce latency and improve access speed, select the region closest to your services.

        +

        Project

        +

        The project corresponds to the current region and can be changed.

        +

        Task Name

        +

        The task name must start with a letter and consist of 4 to 50 characters. It can contain only letters, digits, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).

        +

        Description

        +

        The description consists of a maximum of 256 characters and cannot contain special characters !=<>'&"\

        +
        +
        +
      • Replication instance information +
        + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
        Table 6 Replication instance settings

        Parameter

        +

        Description

        +

        Data Flow

        +

        Select To the cloud.

        +

        The destination is a DB instance on the current cloud.

        +

        Source DB Engine

        +

        Select MySQL.

        +

        Destination DB Engine

        +

        Select DDM.

        +

        Network Type

        +

        Available options: VPC, Public network, and VPN or Direct Connect. By default, the value is Public network.

        +
        • VPC is suitable for migrations of cloud databases in the same region.
        • VPN and Direct Connect are suitable for migrations from on-premises databases to cloud databases or between cloud databases across regions.
        • Public network is suitable for migration from on-premises databases or external cloud databases to destination databases.
        +

        Destination DB Instance

        +

        The DDM instance you created.

        +

        Replication Instance Subnet

        +

        The subnet where the replication instance resides. You can also click View Subnet to go to the network console to view the subnet where the instance resides.

        +

        By default, the DRS instance and the destination DB instance are in the same subnet. You need to select the subnet where the DRS instance resides, and there are available IP addresses for the subnet. To ensure that the replication instance is successfully created, only subnets with DHCP enabled are displayed.

        +

        Migration Type

        +
        • Full: This migration type is suitable for scenarios where service interruption is acceptable. All objects in non-system databases are migrated to the destination database at one time, including tables, views, stored procedures, and triggers.
          NOTE:

          If you are performing a full migration, do not perform operations on the source database. Otherwise, data generated in the source database during the migration will not be synchronized to the destination database.

          +
          +
        • Full+Incremental: This migration type allows you to migrate data without interrupting services. After a full migration initializes the destination database, an incremental migration initiates and parses logs to ensure data consistency between the source and destination databases.
          NOTE:

          If you select Full+Incremental, data generated during the full migration will be continuously synchronized to the destination database, and the source remains accessible.

          +
          +
        +
        +
        +
      • Tags +
        + + + + + + + +
        Table 7 Tags

        Parameter

        +

        Description

        +

        Tags

        +
        • Tags a task. This configuration is optional. Adding tags helps you better identify and manage your tasks. Each task can have up to 20 tags.
        • After a task is created, you can view its tag details on the Tags tab. For details, see Tag Management.
        +
        +
        +
      +

    2. On the Configure Source and Destination Databases page, wait until the replication instance is created. Then, specify source and destination database information and click Test Connection for both the source and destination databases to check whether they have been connected to the replication instance. After the connection tests are successful, select the check box before the agreement and click Next.

      • Source database configuration +
        + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
        Table 8 Source database settings

        Parameter

        +

        Description

        +

        IP Address or Domain Name

        +

        The IP address or domain name of the source database.

        +

        Port

        +

        The port of the source database. Range: 1 – 65535

        +

        Database Username

        +

        The username for accessing the source database.

        +

        Database Password

        +

        The password for the database username.

        +

        SSL Connection

        +

        SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

        +
        NOTE:
        • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
        • If SSL is disabled, your data may be at risk.
        +
        +
        +
        +

        The IP address, domain name, username, and password of the source database are encrypted and stored in DRS, and will be cleared after the task is deleted.

        +
        +
      +
      • Destination database configuration +
        + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
        Table 9 Destination database settings

        Parameter

        +

        Description

        +

        DB Instance Name

        +

        The DDM instance selected when you create the replication instance.

        +

        Database Username

        +

        The username for accessing the destination DDM database.

        +

        Database Password

        +

        The password for the database username.

        +
        +
        +

        The username and password of the destination database are encrypted and stored in DRS, and will be cleared after the task is deleted.

        +
        +
      +

    3. On the Set Task page, select migration objects and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + +
      Table 10 Migration object

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Migrate Object

      +

      You can migrate table-level objects to destination databases based on service requirements.

      +

      If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

      +
      NOTE:
      • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
      • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
      • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
      +
      +
      +
      +

    4. On the Check Task page, check the migration task.

      • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.

        For details about how to handle check items that fail to pass the pre-check, see Solutions to Failed Check Items.

        +
      +
      • If the check is complete and the check success rate is 100%, click Next.

        You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

        +
        +
      +

    5. On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

      +

      + + + + + + + +
      Table 11 Task startup settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Started Time

      +

      Set Start Time to Start upon task creation or Start at a specified time based on site requirements. The Start at a specified time option is recommended.

      +
      NOTE:

      The migration task may affect the performance of the source and destination databases. You are advised to start the task in off-peak hours and reserve two to three days for data verification.

      +
      +
      +
      +

    6. After the task is submitted, view and manage it on the Online Migration Management page.

      • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
      • You can click in the upper right corner to view the latest task status.
      +

    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: To the Cloud
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0090.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0090.html index 3a0dc6fb..09561e91 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0090.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0090.html @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@

    You can choose to migrate all objects, tables, or databases based on your service requirements.

    • All: All objects in the source database are migrated to the destination database. After the migration, the object names will remain the same as those in the source database and cannot be modified.
    • Tables: The selected table-level objects will be migrated.
    • Databases: The selected database-level objects will be migrated.

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    -
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    +
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@
    • If the check is complete and the check success rate is 100%, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 11 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0095.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0095.html index e01c3ee6..f6aab5cd 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0095.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0095.html @@ -370,7 +370,7 @@

    You can choose to migrate all objects, tables, or databases based on your service requirements.

    • All: All objects in the source database are migrated to the destination database. After the migration, the object names will remain the same as those in the source database and cannot be modified.
    • Tables: The selected table-level objects will be migrated.
    • Databases: The selected database-level objects will be migrated.

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    -
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    +
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@
    • If the check is complete and the check success rate is 100%, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 11 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0100.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0100.html index b539831c..4aa918a1 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0100.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0100.html @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@

    You can choose to migrate all objects, tables, or databases based on your service requirements.

    • All: All objects in the source database are migrated to the destination database. After the migration, the object names will remain the same as those in the source database and cannot be modified.
    • Tables: The selected table-level objects will be migrated.
    • Databases: The selected database-level objects will be migrated.

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    -
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    +
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    @@ -327,7 +327,7 @@
    • If the check is complete and the check success rate is 100%, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and confirm that the configured information is correct and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 9 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0101.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0101.html index 61be2766..93ae84cd 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0101.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0101.html @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@

    You can choose to migrate all objects, tables, or databases based on your service requirements.

    • All: All objects in the source database are migrated to the destination database. After the migration, the object names will remain the same as those in the source database and cannot be modified.
    • Tables: The selected table-level objects will be migrated.
    • Databases: The selected database-level objects will be migrated.

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    -
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    +
    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 11 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0102.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0102.html index 49d6c284..d78bb14a 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0102.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0102.html @@ -299,7 +299,7 @@
    • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

      If the database table name contains characters other than letters, digits, and underscores (_), or the mapped database table name contains hyphens (-) and number signs (#), the name length cannot exceed 42 characters.

    • For details about how to import an object file, see Importing Synchronization Objects.
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    -
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    +
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 9 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0104.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0104.html index 83115da7..a4f87674 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0104.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0104.html @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@

    You can synchronize tables based on the service requirements.

    If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    -
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    +
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 8 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0107.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0107.html index 2919b6c6..66972903 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0107.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0107.html @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@
    • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

      When a schema name or table name is mapped, to prevent conflicts between indexes and constraint names, the original index name in the table is changed to the following format after synchronization: i_+hash value+original index name (which may be truncated)+_key The hash value is calculated based on the original schema name_original table name_original index name. Similarly, after the synchronization, the original constraint name on the table is changed to c_ + hash value + original constraint name (which may be truncated) + _key.

    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    -
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    +
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 11 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0115.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0115.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d257335d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0115.html @@ -0,0 +1,293 @@ + + +

    From DDM to MySQL

    +

    Supported Source and Destination Databases

    +
    + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Supported databases

    Source DB

    +

    Destination DB

    +
    • DDM instances
    +
    • RDS for MySQL
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Prerequisites

    • You have logged in to the DRS console.
    • For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.
    +
    +

    Suggestions

    • When a task is being started or in the full synchronization phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.
    • To keep data consistency before and after the synchronization, ensure that no data is written to the destination database during the synchronization.
    +
    +
    • The success of database synchronization depends on environment and manual operations. To ensure a smooth synchronization, perform a synchronization trial before you start the synchronization to help you detect and resolve problems in advance.
    • Start your synchronization task during off-peak hours. A less active database is easier to synchronize successfully. If the data is fairly static, there is less likely to be any severe performance impacts during the synchronization.
      • If network bandwidth is not limited, the query rate of the source database increases by about 50 MB/s during full synchronization, and two to four CPUs are occupied.
      • To ensure data consistency, tables to be synchronized without a primary key may be locked for 3s.
      • The data being synchronized may be locked by other transactions for a long period of time, resulting in read timeout.
      • When DRS concurrently reads data from a database, it will use about 6 to 10 sessions. The impact of the connections on services must be considered.
      • If you read a table, especially a large table, during the full migration, the exclusive lock on that table may be blocked.
      +
    • Data-Level Comparison

      To obtain accurate comparison results, start data comparison at a specified time point during off-peak hours. If it is needed, select Start at a specified time for Comparison Time. Due to slight time difference and continuous operations on data, data inconsistency may occur, reducing the reliability and validity of the comparison results.

      +
    +
    +

    Precautions

    Before creating a synchronization task, read the following notes:

    +
    • You are advised to create an independent database account for DRS task connection to prevent task failures caused by account modification.
    • After changing the account passwords for the source or destination databases, modify the connection information in the DRS task as soon as possible to prevent automatic retry after a task failure. Automatic retry will lock the database accounts.
    +
    + +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 2 Precautions

    Type

    +

    Restrictions

    +

    Database permissions

    +
    • The source database DDM account must have at least one permission, for example, SELECT. The physical sharded database account must have the following permissions: SELECT, SHOW VIEW, EVENT, LOCK TABLES, REPLICATION SLAVE and REPLICATION CLIENT.
    +
    • The destination database user must have the following permissions: SELECT, CREATE, ALTER, DROP, DELETE, INSERT, and UPDATE. The root account of the RDS MySQL DB instance has the preceding permissions by default.
    +

    Synchronization object

    +
    • Full synchronization supports the synchronization of data, table structures, and indexes.
    • The source database cannot contain tables whose sharding keys are timestamp.
    • The sharding key of the source table must be added to the primary key and unique key of the destination table, which means that the primary key and unique key columns of the destination table must contain the sharded columns of the source table to avoid data conflict and inconsistency.
    +

    Source database

    +
    • During the incremental synchronization, the binlog of the source sharded database must be enabled and use the row-based format.
    • If the storage space is sufficient, store the source database binlog for as long as possible. The recommended retention period is three days.
    • During an incremental synchronization, the server_id value of the MySQL source database must be set. If the source database version is MySQL 5.6 or earlier, the server_id value ranges from 2 to 4294967296. If the source database is MySQL 5.7 or later, the server_id value ranges from 1 to 4294967296.
    • The database names and table names of the source database sharding middleware cannot contain the following characters: '<>/\ and non-ASCII characters.
    • Enable skip-name-resolve for the MySQL source database to reduce the possibility of connection timeout.
    • Enable GTID of the source database.
    +

    Destination database

    +
    • The destination DB instance is running properly. If the destination DB instance type is primary/standby, the replication status must also be normal.
    • The destination DB instance must have sufficient storage space.
    • If the destination database (excluding MySQL system database) has the same name as the source database, the table structures in the destination database must be consistent with those in the source database.
    • The character set of the destination database must be the same as that of the source database.
    • The time zone of the destination database must be the same as that of the source database.
    • During a synchronization, a large amount of data is written to the destination database. If the value of the max_allowed_packet parameter of the destination database is too small, data cannot be written. You are advised to set the max_allowed_packet parameter to a value greater than 100 MB.
    +

    Precautions

    +
    • If the data types are incompatible, the synchronization may fail.
    • Resumable upload is supported, but data may be repeatedly inserted into a table that does not have a primary key when the server system breaks down.
    • If the source database contains a duplicate primary key or unique key, the data synchronized to the destination database will be less than that in the source database. Therefore, you must check and correct the data before starting the synchronization task.
    • If the destination DB instance is an RDS MySQL instance, tables encrypted using Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) cannot be synchronized.
    • The destination table can contain more columns than the source table. However, the following failures must be avoided:
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination cannot be null or have default values. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will become null, which does not meet the requirements of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination must be fixed at a default value and have a unique constraint. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will contain multiple default values. That does not meet the unique constraint of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
      +
    +
    • After a task is created, the destination database cannot be set to read-only.
    • After a synchronization task is started, you are not allowed to add a schema or modify the association between the old schema and a new RDS DB instance. Otherwise, the synchronization task will fail.
    • During synchronization, do not modify or delete the usernames, passwords, permissions, or ports of the source and destination databases.
    • During the synchronization, do not change the sharding key of a table on the source DDM instance, or change an unsharded or broadcast table to a sharded table, or change a sharded table to an unsharded or broadcast table.
    • During an incremental synchronization, do not perform the restoration operation on the source database.
    • During incremental synchronization, some DDL operations are supported.
      • DROP_DATABASE, DROP_TABLE, TRUNCATE_TABLE, CREATE_VIEW and DROP_VIEW are not supported.
      • Online DDL is not supported.
      • Tables can be created. For example:
        create table `ddl_test` (id int, c1 varchar(25), primary key(id));
+create table `ddl_test_gho` like `ddl_test`;
        +
      • Tables can be renamed. Both the source and destination tables must be selected. For example:
        rename table `ddl_test` to `ddl_test_new`;
        +
      • Columns in a table can be added and modified, but cannot be deleted. For example:
        alter table `ddl_test` add column `c2` varchar(25); 
+alter table `ddl_test` modify column `c1` varchar(50);
+alter table `ddl_test` alter c1 set default 'xxx';
        +
      • Table indexes can be modified. For example:
        alter table `ddl_test` drop primary key; 
+alter table `ddl_test` add primary key(id); 
+alter table `ddl_test` add index  `ddl_test_uk`(id);
+alter table `ddl_test` drop index `ddl_test_uk`;
        +
      • In table-level synchronization, you can add columns, modify columns, and add primary keys and normal indexes.
      • During database-level synchronization, you can create tables, rename tables, add columns, modify columns, and add primary keys and normal indexes.
      • The name of a table, column, or index to be added or modified cannot exceed 63 characters. Otherwise, the task fails.
      • If a primary key is added to a table that does not have a primary key in the source database, the DDL operation must contain the first column. Otherwise, the task fails.
      +
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Procedure

    1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click Create Synchronization Task.
    2. On the Create Synchronization Instance page, specify the task name, description, and the synchronization instance details, and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 3 Task and recipient description

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Region

      +

      The region where the synchronization instance is deployed. You can change the region.

      +

      Project

      +

      The project corresponds to the current region and can be changed.

      +

      Task Name

      +

      The task name must start with a letter and consist of 4 to 50 characters. It can contain only letters, digits, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).

      +

      Description

      +

      The description consists of a maximum of 256 characters and cannot contain special characters !=<>'&"\

      +
      +
      + +
      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 4 Synchronization instance settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Data Flow

      +

      Select To the cloud.

      +

      Source DB Engine

      +

      Select DDM.

      +

      Destination DB Engine

      +

      Select MySQL.

      +

      Network Type

      +

      The public network is used as an example. Available options: VPC, Public network and VPN or Direct Connect

      +

      Destination DB Instance

      +

      The RDS DB instance you created.

      +

      Synchronization Instance Subnet

      +

      Select the subnet where the synchronization instance is located. You can also click View Subnet to go to the network console to view the subnet where the instance resides.

      +

      By default, the DRS instance and the destination DB instance are in the same subnet. You need to select the subnet where the DRS instance resides and ensure that there are available IP addresses. To ensure that the synchronization instance is successfully created, only subnets with DHCP enabled are displayed.

      +

      Synchronization Mode

      +
      • Full+Incremental

        This synchronization mode allows you to synchronize data in real time. After a full synchronization initializes the destination database, an incremental synchronization parses logs to ensure data consistency between the source and destination databases.

        +
      • Full

        All objects and data in non-system databases are synchronized to the destination database at a time. This mode is applicable to scenarios where service interruption is acceptable.

        +
      • Incremental

        Through log parsing, incremental data generated on the source database is synchronized to the destination database.

        +
      +
      NOTE:

      If you select Full+Incremental, data generated during the full synchronization will be continuously synchronized to the destination database, and the source remains accessible.

      +
      +

      Source DB Instance Quantity

      +

      The default minimum number of source DB instances is 2. You can set this parameter based on the number of source database shards.

      +
      NOTE:

      After a task is created, DRS creates subtasks, whose quantity is the same as the number of source DB instances. Each subtask migrates data from its source database to the destination database.

      +
      +

      Tags

      +
      • This setting is optional. Adding tags helps you better identify and manage your tasks. Each task can have up to 20 tags.
      • After a task is created, you can view its tag details on the Tags tab. For details, see Tag Management.
      +
      +
      +

      If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. After three days, the task automatically ends.

      +
      +

    3. On the Configure Source and Destination Databases page, wait until the synchronization instance is created. Then, specify source and destination database information and click Test Connection for both the source and destination databases to check whether they have been connected to the synchronization instance. After the connection tests are successful, select the check box before the agreement and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 5 Source database settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Middleware IP Address or Domain Name

      +

      The IP address or domain name of the source database.

      +

      Port

      +

      The port of the source database. Range: 1 – 65535

      +

      Middleware Username

      +

      The username of the source DDM instance.

      +

      Middleware Password

      +

      The password for the source DDM instance username.

      +

      SSL Connection

      +

      SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

      +
      NOTE:
      • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
      • If the SSL certificate is not used, your data may be at risk.
      +
      +

      DB Instance

      +

      The sharded database details.

      +
      +
      +

      The IP address, domain name, username, and password of the source database are encrypted and stored in DRS, and will be cleared after the task is deleted.

      +
      +
      +
      + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 6 Destination database settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      DB Instance Name

      +

      The RDS DB instance you selected when creating the synchronization task. This parameter cannot be changed.

      +

      Database Username

      +

      The username for accessing the destination database.

      +

      Database Password

      +

      The database username and password are encrypted and stored in the system and will be cleared after the task is deleted.

      +
      +
      +
      +

    4. On the Set Synchronization Task page, select the objects to be synchronized, and then click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + +
      Table 7 Synchronization mode and object

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Synchronization Object

      +

      DRS supports table-level synchronization. You can select data for synchronization based on your service requirements. To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.

      +
      NOTE:
      • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
      • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
      +
      • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
      • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
      +
      +
      +
      +

    5. On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

      • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
      • If all check items are successful, click Next.

        You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

        +
        +
      +

    6. On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

      +

      + + + + + + + +
      Table 8 Task startup settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Started Time

      +

      Set Start Time to Start upon task creation or Start at a specified time based on site requirements.

      +
      NOTE:

      After a synchronization task is started, the performance of the source and destination databases may be affected. You are advised to start a synchronization task during off-peak hours.

      +
      +
      +
      +

    7. After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

      • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
      • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
      +

    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: To the Cloud
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0117.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0117.html index 2044752e..b00a2296 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0117.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0117.html @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@
    • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

      If the database table name contains characters other than letters, digits, and underscores (_), or the mapped database table name contains hyphens (-) and number signs (#), the name length cannot exceed 42 characters.

    • For details about how to import an object file, see Importing Synchronization Objects.
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    -
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    +
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 8 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0118.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0118.html index 7b81c4a6..4f4b960e 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0118.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0118.html @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@

    Available options: Tables or Databases as required.

    • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    -
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    +
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 8 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0121.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0121.html index 40f03254..4010d37c 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0121.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0121.html @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@

    DRS supports table-level synchronization. You can select data for synchronization based on your service requirements.

    If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    -
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    +
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    Table 10 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0122.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0122.html index 40970f18..23bb0312 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0122.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0122.html @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@
    • If the check is complete and the check success rate is 100%, go to the Compare Parameter page.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and DR instance details. Then, click Submit.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and DR instance details. Then, click Submit.

    Table 11 Task and recipient description

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0123.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0123.html index c43289e2..813c9e14 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0123.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0123.html @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@
    • If the check is complete and the check success rate is 100%, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time and DR instance details. Then, click Submit.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time and DR instance details. Then, click Submit.

    Table 8 Task and recipient description

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0128.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0128.html index 17b7021d..f8c28ac2 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0128.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0128.html @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@

  • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

    • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
    • If all check items are successful, click Next.

      You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

    -

  • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    +

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Table 8 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0446.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0446.html index 74a17bea..949ca83e 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0446.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0446.html @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@

    Select Tables or Databases as required.

    • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    -
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    +
    • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    Table 8 Task startup settings

    Parameter

    Description

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0451.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0451.html index 08161754..131e2816 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0451.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0451.html @@ -8,6 +8,8 @@
  • From MySQL to Kafka
    • +
  • From DDM to MySQL
    +
  • From GaussDB Distributed to MySQL
    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0453.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0453.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ade0cbdc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0453.html @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + +

    From DDM to MySQL

    +

    Supported Source and Destination Databases

    +
    + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Supported databases

    Source DB

    +

    Destination DB

    +
    • DDM instances
    +
    • On-premises MySQL databases
    • MySQL databases on an ECS
    • MySQL databases on other clouds
    • RDS for MySQL
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Prerequisites

    • You have logged in to the DRS console.
    • For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.
    +
    +

    Suggestions

    • When a task is being started or in the full synchronization phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.
    • To keep data consistency before and after the synchronization, ensure that no data is written to the destination database during the synchronization.
    +
    +
    • The success of database synchronization depends on environment and manual operations. To ensure a smooth synchronization, perform a synchronization trial before you start the synchronization to help you detect and resolve problems in advance.
    • Start your synchronization task during off-peak hours. A less active database is easier to synchronize successfully. If the data is fairly static, there is less likely to be any severe performance impacts during the synchronization.
      • If network bandwidth is not limited, the query rate of the source database increases by about 50 MB/s during full synchronization, and two to four CPUs are occupied.
      • To ensure data consistency, tables to be synchronized without a primary key may be locked for 3s.
      • The data being synchronized may be locked by other transactions for a long period of time, resulting in read timeout.
      • When DRS concurrently reads data from a database, it will use about 6 to 10 sessions. The impact of the connections on services must be considered.
      • If you read a table, especially a large table, during the full migration, the exclusive lock on that table may be blocked.
      +
    • Data-Level Comparison

      To obtain accurate comparison results, start data comparison at a specified time point during off-peak hours. If it is needed, select Start at a specified time for Comparison Time. Due to slight time difference and continuous operations on data, data inconsistency may occur, reducing the reliability and validity of the comparison results.

      +
    +
    +

    Precautions

    Before creating a synchronization task, read the following notes:

    + +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 2 Precautions

    Type

    +

    Restrictions

    +

    Database permissions

    +
    • The source database DDM account must have the SELECT permission. The physical sharded database account must have the following permissions: SELECT, SHOW VIEW, EVENT, LOCK TABLES, REPLICATION SLAVE and REPLICATION CLIENT.
    +
    • The destination database user must have the following permissions: SELECT, CREATE, DROP, DELETE, INSERT, and UPDATE. The root account of the RDS MySQL DB instance has the preceding permissions by default.
    +

    Synchronization object

    +
    • Full synchronization supports the synchronization of data, table structures, and indexes.
    • The source database cannot contain tables whose sharding keys are timestamp.
    • The sharding key of the source table must be added to the primary key and unique key of the destination table, which means that the primary key and unique key columns of the destination table must contain the sharded columns of the source table to avoid data conflict and inconsistency.
    +

    Source database

    +
    • During the incremental synchronization, the binlog of the source sharded database must be enabled and use the row-based format.
    • If the storage space is sufficient, store the source database binlog for as long as possible. The recommended retention period is three days.
    • During an incremental synchronization, the server_id value of the MySQL source database must be set. If the source database version is MySQL 5.6 or earlier, the server_id value ranges from 2 to 4294967296. If the source database is MySQL 5.7 or later, the server_id value ranges from 1 to 4294967296.
    • The database names and table names of the source sharding middleware cannot contain the following characters: '<>/\ and non-ASCII characters.
    • Enable skip-name-resolve for the MySQL source database to reduce the possibility of connection timeout.
    • Enable GTID of the source database.
    +

    Destination database

    +
    • The destination database is an on-premises MySQL database.
    • The destination DB instance must have sufficient storage space.
    • If the destination database (excluding MySQL system database) has the same name as the source database, the table structures in the destination database must be consistent with those in the source database.
    • The character set of the destination database must be the same as that of the source database.
    • The time zone of the destination database must be the same as that of the source database.
    • During a synchronization, a large amount of data is written to the destination database. If the value of the max_allowed_packet parameter of the destination database is too small, data cannot be written. You are advised to set the max_allowed_packet parameter to a value greater than 100 MB.
    +

    Precautions

    +
    • If the data types are incompatible, the synchronization may fail.
    • If the source database contains a duplicate primary key or unique key, the data synchronized to the destination database will be less than that in the source database. Therefore, you must check and correct the data before starting the synchronization task.
    • If the destination DB instance is an RDS MySQL instance, tables encrypted using Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) cannot be synchronized.
    • If the destination MySQL database does not support TLS 1.2 or is a self-built database of an earlier version (earlier than 5.6.46 or between 5.7 and 5.7.28), you need to submit an O&M application for testing the SSL connection.
    • The destination table can contain more columns than the source table. However, the following failures must be avoided:
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination cannot be null or have default values. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will become null, which does not meet the requirements of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination must be fixed at a default value and have a unique constraint. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will contain multiple default values. That does not meet the unique constraint of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
      +
    • Resumable upload is supported, but data may be repeatedly inserted into a table that does not have a primary key when the server system breaks down.
    • When creating a synchronization task, do not set the destination database to read-only.
    • After a synchronization task is created, you are not allowed to add a schema or modify the association between the old schema and a new RDS DB instance. Otherwise, the synchronization task will fail.
    • During synchronization, do not modify or delete the usernames, passwords, permissions, or ports of the source and destination databases.
    • During the synchronization, do not change the sharding key of a table on the source DDM instance, or change an unsharded or broadcast table to a sharded table, or change a sharded table to an unsharded or broadcast table.
    • DDL operations are not supported during synchronization.
    • During an incremental synchronization, do not modify the table structure to be synchronized in the source database.
    • During an incremental synchronization, do not perform the restoration operation on the source database.
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: Out of the Cloud
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0465.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0465.html index 616afa57..45ccabb3 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0465.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0465.html @@ -27,45 +27,48 @@

    Precautions

    Before creating a synchronization task, read the following notes:

    +
    • You are advised to create an independent database account for DRS task connection to prevent task failures caused by account modification.
    • After changing the account passwords for the source or destination databases, modify the connection information in the DRS task as soon as possible to prevent automatic retry after a task failure. Automatic retry will lock the database accounts.
    +
    -
    Table 2 Precautions

    Type

    +
    - - - - - - - - - - -
    Table 2 Precautions

    Type

    Restrictions

    +

    Restrictions

    Database permissions

    +

    Database permissions

    • The source database DDM account must have the SELECT permission. The physical sharded database account must have the following permissions: SELECT, SHOW VIEW, EVENT, LOCK TABLES, REPLICATION SLAVE and REPLICATION CLIENT.
    • The DDM destination database user must have the following permissions: CREATE, DROP, ALTER, INDEX, INSERT, DELETE, UPDATE, and SELECT. In addition, grant the select permission on all tables.
    • The DDM destination database user must have the permission on the database to be synchronized.
    +
    • The source database DDM account must have at least one permission, for example, SELECT. The physical sharded database account must have the following permissions: SELECT, SHOW VIEW, EVENT, LOCK TABLES, REPLICATION SLAVE and REPLICATION CLIENT.
    +
    • The DDM destination database user must have the following permissions: CREATE, DROP, ALTER, INDEX, INSERT, DELETE, UPDATE, and SELECT. In addition, grant the SELECT permission on all tables.
    • The DDM destination database user must have the permission on the database to be synchronized.

    Synchronization object

    +

    Synchronization object

    • Full synchronization supports the synchronization of data, table structures, and indexes.
    • The source database cannot contain tables whose sharding keys are timestamp.
    • Tables with storage engine different to MyISAM and InnoDB cannot be synchronized.
    +
    • Full synchronization supports the synchronization of data, table structures, and indexes.
    • The source database cannot contain tables whose sharding keys are timestamp.
    • Tables with storage engine different to MyISAM and InnoDB cannot be synchronized.

    Source database

    +

    Source database

    • During the incremental synchronization, the binlog of the source sharded database must be enabled and use the row-based format.
    • If the storage space is sufficient, store the source database binlog for as long as possible. The recommended retention period is three days.
    • During an incremental synchronization, the server_id value of the MySQL source database must be set. If the source database version is MySQL 5.6 or earlier, the server_id value ranges from 2 to 4294967296. If the source database is MySQL 5.7 or later, the server_id value ranges from 1 to 4294967296.
    • The database names and table names of the source sharding middleware cannot contain the following characters: '<>/\ and non-ASCII characters.
    • Enable skip-name-resolve for the MySQL source database to reduce the possibility of connection timeout.
    • Enable GTID of the source database.
    +
    • During the incremental synchronization, the binlog of the source sharded database must be enabled and use the row-based format.
    • If the storage space is sufficient, store the source database binlog for as long as possible. The recommended retention period is three days.
    • During an incremental synchronization, the server_id value of the MySQL source database must be set. If the source database version is MySQL 5.6 or earlier, the server_id value ranges from 2 to 4294967296. If the source database is MySQL 5.7 or later, the server_id value ranges from 1 to 4294967296.
    • The database names and table names of the source sharding middleware cannot contain the following characters: '<>/\ and non-ASCII characters.
    • Enable skip-name-resolve for the MySQL source database to reduce the possibility of connection timeout.
    • Enable GTID of the source database.

    Destination database

    +

    Destination database

    • Create a schema for the destination database in advance.
    • Ensure that the destination database is empty before starting the synchronization. Otherwise, data in the destination may be overwritten during incremental synchronization.
    +
    • Create a schema for the destination database in advance.
    • Ensure that the destination database is empty before starting the synchronization. Otherwise, data in the destination may be overwritten during incremental synchronization.
    • The destination instance and associated RDS instance must be available. If the RDS instance type is primary/standby, the replication status must be normal.
    • The associated RDS instance must have sufficient storage space.
    • The character set of the associated RDS database must be the same as that of the source database.
    • If the destination instance uses columns of the TIMESTAMP or DATETIME data type as its sharding key, the seconds precision of the column is removed after the synchronization.
    • The value of AUTO_INCREMENT of a table in the destination database cannot be less than that of AUTO_INCREMENT of a table in the source database.

    Precautions

    +

    Precautions

    • If the data types are incompatible, the synchronization may fail.
    • The destination table can contain more columns than the source table. However, the following failures must be avoided:
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination cannot be null or have default values. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will become null, which does not meet the requirements of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination must be fixed at a default value and have a unique constraint. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will contain multiple default values. That does not meet the unique constraint of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
      -
    • During synchronization, do not modify or delete the usernames, passwords, permissions, or ports of the source and destination databases.
    • During synchronization, do not modify the table structure to be synchronized in the source database.
    • During the synchronization, do not change the sharding key of a table on the source DDM instance, or change an unsharded or broadcast table to a sharded table, or change a sharded table to an unsharded or broadcast table.
    • During an incremental synchronization, do not perform the restoration operation on the source database.
    • During an incremental synchronization of table-level objects, renaming tables is not recommended.
    • During the task startup or full synchronization, you are not advised to perform DDL operations, such as deletion, on the source database. Otherwise, the synchronization may fail.
    • If the target DDM version is later than 3.0.4.1, DRS automatically updates the start value of the DDM sequence when the task is complete.
    • Set the expire_log_day parameter for the physical shards of the source middleware to a proper value to ensure that the binlog at the breakpoint does not expire during restoration and that the service can be successfully restored after interruption.
    +
    • If the data types are incompatible, the synchronization may fail.
    • The destination table can contain more columns than the source table. However, the following failures must be avoided:
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination cannot be null or have default values. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will become null, which does not meet the requirements of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination must be fixed at a default value and have a unique constraint. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will contain multiple default values. That does not meet the unique constraint of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
      +
    • During synchronization, do not modify or delete the usernames, passwords, permissions, or ports of the source and destination databases.
    • During synchronization, do not modify the table structure to be synchronized in the source database.
    • During the synchronization, do not change the sharding key of a table on the source DDM instance, or change an unsharded or broadcast table to a sharded table, or change a sharded table to an unsharded or broadcast table.
    • During an incremental synchronization, do not perform the restoration operation on the source database.
    • During an incremental synchronization of table-level objects, renaming tables is not recommended.
    • During the task startup or full synchronization, you are not advised to perform DDL operations, such as deletion, on the source database. Otherwise, the synchronization may fail.
    • If the target DDM version is later than 3.0.4.1, DRS automatically updates the start value of the DDM sequence when the task is complete.
    • Set the expire_log_day parameter for the physical shards of the source middleware to a proper value to ensure that the binlog at the breakpoint does not expire during restoration and that the service can be successfully restored after interruption.
    • The destination database user cannot be an administrator.
    -

    Procedure

    1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click Create Synchronization Task.
    2. On the Create Synchronization Instance page, specify the task name, description, and the synchronization instance details, and click Next.

      • Task information description +

        Procedure

        1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click Create Synchronization Task.
        2. On the Create Synchronization Instance page, specify the task name, description, and the synchronization instance details, and click Next.

          • Task information description
            -
            Table 3 Task and recipient description

            Parameter

            Description

            @@ -143,15 +146,17 @@

            Source DB Instance Quantity

            Specifies the number of DB instances bound to the source DDM database. The default value is 2. The value ranges from 1 to 64. Set this parameter based on the site requirements.

            +

            Specifies the number of DB instances bound to the source DDM database. The default value is 2. The value ranges from 1 to 64. Set this parameter based on the site requirements.

            +
            NOTE:

            After a task is created, DRS creates subtasks, whose quantity is the same as the number of source DB instances. Each subtask migrates data from its source database to the destination database.

            +
          -
          • Tags -
            @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@

          • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

            • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
            • If all check items are successful, click Next.

              You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

            -

          • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

            +

          • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

            • Table 5 Tags

            Parameter

            +
            • Tags +
              @@ -159,13 +164,15 @@ -
              Table 5 Tags

              Parameter

              Description

              Tags

              • This setting is optional. Adding tags helps you better identify and manage your tasks. Each task can have up to 20 tags.
              • After a task is created, you can view its tag details on the Tags tab. For details, see Tag Management.
              +
              • Tags a task. This configuration is optional. Adding tags helps you better identify and manage your tasks. Each task can have up to 20 tags.
              • After a task is created, you can view its tag details on the Tags tab. For details, see Tag Management.
            +

            If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. After three days, the task automatically ends.

            +

          • On the Configure Source and Destination Databases page, wait until the synchronization instance is created. Then, specify source and destination database information and click Test Connection for both the source and destination databases to check whether they have been connected to the synchronization instance. After the connection tests are successful, select the check box before the agreement and click Next.

            @@ -250,10 +257,10 @@ - @@ -263,7 +270,7 @@

          • On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

            • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
            • If all check items are successful, click Next.

              You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

            -

          • On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

            +

          • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

            • Table 6 Source database settings

            Parameter

            Synchronization Object

            Select Tables or Databases as required.

            +

            Select Tables, Databases, or Import object file as required.

            If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

            NOTE:
            • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
            • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
            -
            • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
            • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
            +
            • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
            • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
            Table 9 Task startup settings

            Parameter

            Description

            diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0003.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0003.html index 34a3c831..fe94e35a 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0003.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0003.html @@ -14,6 +14,8 @@
          • From Oracle to PostgreSQL
            • +
          • From DDM to MySQL
            +
          • From DDM to DDM
            • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0004.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0004.html index c263c967..44be7b2f 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0004.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0004.html @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@
            -
            • If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. After three days, the task automatically ends.
            • Deleted synchronization tasks are not displayed in the status list.
            +
            • If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. After three days, the task automatically ends.
            • By default, DRS retains a task in the Configuration state for three days. After three days, DRS automatically deletes background resources, but the task status remains unchanged. When you reconfigure the task, DRS applies for resources for the task again.
            • Deleted synchronization tasks are not displayed in the status list.
            • For a task whose source database is DDM or GaussDB Distributed,the statuses listed above mean statuses of its subtask.
            diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0005.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0005.html index 176864ae..5d541daa 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0005.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0005.html @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@
            • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

              If the database table name contains characters other than letters, digits, and underscores (_), or the mapped database table name contains hyphens (-) and number signs (#), the name length cannot exceed 42 characters.

            • For details about how to import an object file, see Importing Synchronization Objects.
            NOTE:
            • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
            • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
            -
            • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
            • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
            +
            • If an object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are two or more consecutive spaces in the middle of the object name, only one space is displayed.
            • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
            • Table 7 Task startup settings

            Parameter

            Description

            diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_07_0008.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_07_0008.html index 17295736..e3284cb9 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_07_0008.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_07_0008.html @@ -7,6 +7,8 @@
            • Editing Subscription Task Information
              • +
            • Modifying Connection Information
              +
            • Modifying the Flow Control Mode
            • Editing a DR Task
              diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0003.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0003.html index b99e39f5..174246fd 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0003.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0003.html @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@

              View the information about the synchronization tasks and synchronization instances. This section describes how to view details about a synchronization task you have created.

              Prerequisites

              You have logged in to the DRS console.

              -

              Procedure

              In the task list, only tasks created by the current login user are displayed. Tasks created by different users of the same tenant are not displayed.

              +

              Procedure

              • In the task list, only tasks created by the current login user are displayed. Tasks created by different users of the same tenant are not displayed.
              • For a task whose source database is MySQL Schema and Logic Table or DDM, the task details of each subtask contain the information about the source and destination databases corresponding to the subtask.
              1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click the target synchronization task name in the Task Name/ID column.
              2. On the displayed Basic Information page, view details about the migration task.

                You can view information about the task, synchronization instance, and synchronization.

              diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0008.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0008.html index 359aa64d..b3281210 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0008.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0008.html @@ -1,10 +1,12 @@

              Step 3: View Synchronization Logs

              -

              Synchronization logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the synchronization process. This section describes how to view synchronization logs to locate and analyze database problems.

              +

              Synchronization logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the synchronization process. This section describes how to view synchronization logs to locate and analyze database problems.

              Prerequisites

              You have logged in to the DRS console.

              -

              Procedure

              1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click the target synchronization task name in the Task Name/ID column.
              2. On the displayed page, click Synchronization Logs to view the logs generated during the synchronization.

                You can view time, levels, and descriptions of the logs.

                +

                Procedure

                1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click the target synchronization task name in the Task Name/ID column.
                2. On the displayed page, click Synchronization Logs to view the logs generated during the synchronization.

                  You can view time, levels, and descriptions of the logs.

                  +

                  For a task whose source database is DDM, you can view the migration logs in each subtask.

                  +

              diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0402.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0402.html index 20c0ae31..a05862a4 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0402.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0402.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@

              Importing Synchronization Objects

              Real-time synchronization supports the import of objects through files. After a task is created, you can import object files on the Set Synchronization Task page.

              -
              • Only Windows Microsoft Excel 97-2003 (*.xls), 2007, and later (*.xlsx) files can be imported. The downloaded compressed package provides the templates of the two versions.
              • The file name can contain only spaces, letters, digits, hyphens (-), underscores (_), and parentheses.
              • The format of the object information in the template must meet the Excel file requirements. The database object names (such as the database name, schema name, or table name) in the file is case-sensitive and cannot include angle brackets (<>), periods (.), double quotation marks ("), and cannot start or end with a space.
              • The task in the configuration supports table-level synchronization, database-level synchronization, or file import mode. Each time you switch to a new mode, the selected or imported database objects are cleared, and you need to select or import them again.
              • If you want to import a file for mapping, fill in the first and second columns of the file based on the template. If the first two columns of a row are left blank, the row will be ignored.
              • For the task created using the file import mode, database-level and table-level synchronization are not supported after the task is started.
              • If you edit a task, the imported file must contain information about all objects. Importing only the updated objects is not allowed.
              • If you edit a task again, the objects that have been synchronized cannot be mapped again. Ensure that the object names remain unchanged after the mapping.
              • If you edit a task again, the exported object information is the synchronized object information.
              • If the verification fails after the file is uploaded, click View Failure Details to download the error information.
              • The object names entered in the Excel file must use the same letter case as the source object names.
              +
              • Only Windows Microsoft Excel 97-2003 (*.xls) and 2007 and later (*.xlsx) files can be imported. The downloaded compressed package provides the templates of the two versions.
              • The file name can contain only spaces, letters, digits, hyphens (-), underscores (_), and parentheses.
              • The format of the object information in the template must meet the Excel file requirements. The database object names (such as the database name, schema name, or table name) in the file is case-sensitive and cannot include angle brackets (<>), periods (.), double quotation marks ("), and cannot start or end with a space.
              • The task in the configuration supports table-level synchronization, database-level synchronization, or file import mode. Each time you switch to a new mode, the selected or imported database objects are cleared, and you need to select or import them again.
              • If you want to import a file for mapping, fill in the first and second columns of the file based on the template. If the first two columns of a row are left blank, the row will be ignored.
              • For the task created using the file import mode, database-level and table-level synchronization are not supported after the task is started.
              • If you edit a task, the imported file must contain information about all objects. Importing only the updated objects is not allowed.
              • If you edit a task again, the objects that have been synchronized cannot be mapped again. Ensure that the object names remain unchanged after the mapping.
              • If you edit a task again, the exported object information is the synchronized object information.
              • If the verification fails after the file is uploaded, click View Failure Details to download the error information.
              • The object names entered in the Excel file must use the same letter case as the source object names.

              Procedure

              1. On the Set Synchronization Task page, click Import object file in the Synchronization Object field.
              2. Click Download Template.
              3. Download the template and enter information about the objects to be imported.
              4. Click Select File. In the displayed dialog box, select the edited template.
              5. Click Upload.

              diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_online_migration.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_online_migration.html index a650e0f6..b664370d 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_online_migration.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_online_migration.html @@ -6,6 +6,8 @@